Home

FP0 User`s Manual

1. First Second Third raga at of control expansion expansion expansion I O unit unit I O unit NENNEN 10 Input 6 Output 4 bri nput 6 Output 4 14 Input 8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 6 E _ 10 8 Input 10 Output 8 x nput 6 Output 4 nput4 Output 4 14 8 Input 12 Output 10 nput 8 Output 6 nput 4 Output 4 10 16 Input 14 Output 12 s nput 6 Output 4 nput8 Output 8 10 8 8 nput 6 Output 4 nput4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 B 14 4 16 Input 16 Output 14 ES nput8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 8 P 14 8 8 nput 8 Output 6 nput4 Output 4 nput 4 Output 4 10 16 8 Input 18 Output 16 nput 6 Output 4 nput 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 ES 10 8 8 8 gt nput 6 Output 4 nput4 Output 4 nput 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 14 16 n 8 Input 20 Output 18 nput 8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 14 8 8 8 gt nput 8 Output 6 nput4
2. Illustration FPO C 16T Reference measurements for wiring 18 0 709 3 5 0 138 25 0 0 984 S Approx 78 0 3 071 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 m m St q n i S S e e o o 2N LY 3 5 0 138 unit mm in 1 4 FPO0 C32T C32CT C32P C32C P T32CT T32CP Illustration FPO C32T Reference measurements for wiring 3 5 0 138 SIS Oat Approx 78 0 3 071 gt 60 0 2 362 30 0 1 181 60 0 2 362 4 Dodo m m m 8 x 8 Y Y gt 3 5 0 138 unit mm in FPO Dimensions A 2 FPO Power Supply Unit A L5 FPOS LINK Control Unit 30 0 10 4 60 0 g 1 181 533 2 362 E guuuu t i s H oO Es CONNECTOR eB 2 90 0 5 3 543 2 ena sls EISE won I b E z g nnnn Y CLIE 9 7 5 354 295 17 DIN standard rail 7 6697 DIN EN50022 35 mm 1 378 inch width unit mm in attachme
3. aut side 5 6 kQ ss oe hi n 5 L Internal J gt Note 1 l circuit PT i e l e 5 6 T 9 1 an b e p y Intemal Wg y Noten 24 V DC circuit dies T T Note 2 KIT LE A COM Output side C Ld T Intemall p 9 Load circuit Y ur af I YO 28 A LL WW Rf Yn Internal e Load e circuit Y E T 24V DC 4 Load voltage and external power supply tae Notes 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 for XO through X5 and 1 for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Control Units 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 1 C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM o O X95 X 0 5 5 0 4 aae 5 o0 e Pil I m 5 EROR I Hr curs hum TE 5m o Eia prog PS PROG l EN Note voll 5 YO Load H 3 5 Load 9 eda E ir Y3 8 Power supply VJ A COM VJ 8 Load 5 DB s Load H Power supply 2 4 2 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14
4. X0 7 GO Status RUN 5 om indicator ga 15 LEDs PROG om IG 3m ERROR 4m ALARM EL RUN E cm 7 z PROG LED status m Program Description execution Normal operation in RUN Condition Normal zohdiHon or fon OFF Normal operation in PROG Stop mode OFF OFF Forcing ON OFF in RUN mode OFF Blink When a self diagnostic error Abnormal OFF on erk occurs condition When a system watchdog Normally if an error occurs operation of FPO stops The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicate output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the system registers with TOOL software 11 3 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function 11 1 Allowing Duplicated Output When you change system register 20 settings ENAB using the programming software duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the FPO continues to operate 11 1 2 Continuing After an Operation Error When you change system register 26 settings CONT using the programming software the FPO continues to operate In this case even if the FPO continues to operate this is regarded as an error 11 4 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubles hooting 11 2 1
5. Output Ime Notes e The two COM terminals of input terminal 0 7 are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Control Units 2 4 5 C32T C32CT T32CT O utput Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Notes Load 2 4 Pin Layouts 0 7 X8 F RUN 18 a nav Ac ANT EE B 5 oo 8 5 COM TFT Hab d OM PROG w7 F e YO Y1 o Y8 Y9 utu A4 oo in oo al A L1 cy gt C e The four COM terminals of input terminals X0 7 and X8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externall
6. S LINK control unit 10 20 30 40 JJ Bex x fof 4 80 70 60 50 Broken wire Decimal points light up lt Multiple broken wires gt 32 hexadecimal 50 decimal Chapter 5 Allocation 51 6 5 3 52 Control Unit ssssssssseee 5 4 5 3 Expansion I O Ee 5 5 1 0 Allocation FPO FPO 1 0 Allocation 5 1 1 0 Number 5 1 1 0 Number Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Example External input relay X X X0 X1 Decimal XLO XT pei ba alee X20 X21 cic aet t X2F AB F Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 Specifying X and Y numbers On the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example The same number X20 and Y 20 can be used for input and output I O Allocation FPO 5 2 Control Unit 5 2 Control Unit The I O allocation of the FPO control unit is fixed Type number C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM Input 6 points X0 to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Input 8 points X0 to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 6161 C 16CT C16P C16CP Input 8 points X0 to X7 Output 8
7. Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Stored Y Y Y Reception A A A Are E E E buffer B B B BF B le c C C C e G m m Number of recep 1 lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 0 gt 1 2 3 tion bytes cleared when F144 TRNS Write pointer Number of bytes received is instruction is executed Half duplex transmission should be used for general use serial communication Reception is disabled when the reception completed flag R 9038 is on Be aware that the reception completed flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress Example If the reception completed flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the error flag R9037 reception completed flag R9038 and transmission completed flag R9039 go off Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 TRNS instruction is being executed Check the transmission completed flag R9039 to determine whether duplex transmission is possible 10 8 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 30 perations When Using General use Serial Communication When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer returns to the initial address in the reception buffer Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on To resume reception exec
8. C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM All control unit types C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM terminal type connector type B z E E 5 CONNECTOR EB E ls E 1 EI JET IERO 4 2 v 515 4 C16T C16CT C32T C32CT Control unit with RS232C port C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP OOO0U000 00000000 j FPO Control Units 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 7 2 3 Status indicator LEDs display the operation mode and error statuses section 2 1 1 1 2 Mode switch changes the operation mode section 2 1 1 2 3 9 49 65 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool section 2 1 1 3 4 60 Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC Itis connected using the power supply cable AFP 0581 that comes with the unit Input terminal 9 pin 6 Output terminal 9 pin The input and output terminals 5 and use a terminal block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co product number 1840434 section 7 6 43 Input connector 9 pin 42 Output connector 9 pin The input and output connectors 4 and 2 use a connector made by Mole
9. Ie Note NENSNEER 1 C The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 11 E16YT Output Output Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Ie Notes e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e Thetwo terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 12 E16YP Output Output 9 Load Load Load Load Load Load Load
10. 5 12 14 12 4 3 Table or System Registers uns note nicer is sheen RT 12 16 12 5 Table of Special Internal Relays ccc cece eects 12 26 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers zaeesdevs ater PCR ays 12 29 Error CodeS euer Soviet rrt re 12 39 12 8 Table of RE MERSERE MEET eee LAGS 12 52 12 8 1 Table of Basic Instructions ee Le EE love lesa tees 12 52 12 8 2 12 80 12 9 FPO SL1S LINK Address 12 140 12 10 Binary Hexadecimal BCD Expressions 12 141 12 1 AS CWE Eure 12 142 Table of Contents FPO Appendix A Dimensions A 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit sssusa 3 1 1 FPO CIORS CIOCRS CIA4RS CIA4CRS E8RS E16RS A 3 1 2 FPO C1O0RM C1O0CRM C14RM C14CRM E8RM E16RM 3 A 1 3 FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP E16T E16P E8X E 8Y T E8YP E32TJE32P7EIOXIE JO Y TIE LOR Lia ER IRE RE A 4 A 1 4 FPO0 C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP A 4 A 1 5 FPOS LINK Control Unit Peng A 5 A 2 FPO Power Supply Unit ica I aont ed rca PESE ra A 5 A 3 Mounting on DIN Rail zs sime ke REX RE ETE Rs RYE AE A 6 A 4 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate e ebore e Pes A 7 A 5 FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate cob eec
11. I poeo 9 EU ea e a z TZ 5 oo an a LIN H 1 H dp up H Bis un uu 5 sa nn LN CECEROIDU HDICICIZCY AED fobotodo ooo n 5 2o o HA a FEE E 55 5 a Al do o o o Du uhuna uhdhnbn oooooooo mo r ow m mo Pom a amp E Cor REPE erae En Control unit First S econd Third expansion unit expansion unit expansion unit Maximum possible expansion is with a total of 3 units Contollable I O Points Control unit When the expansion unitis When the expansion unit is control unit only the same output type as the a transistor output type control unit C10R 10 points max 58 points max 106 points C14R 14 points max 62 points max 110 points C16T C16P 16 points max 112 points max 112 points C32 T32 32 points max 128 points max 128 points Overview FPO 13 Combination Possibilities 13 Combination Possibilities 13 1 Relay Output Type Units
12. 8 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction on oO BBW 10 d 19 12 13 14 16 18 19 20 el a 00 NNN UUM A sio 10 dl 312 13 13 14 16 1 UJ vii Table of Contents FPO 8 6 Precautions for Programming zs sees eed en Seb ches eb RR EE ER 8 18 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN us rss Rau ses 8 19 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN soose 8 19 8 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible 8 20 8 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN 8 21 8 7 4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer Il 8 22 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 23 8 8 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer Il 8 23 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area 8 24 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output 05 8 27 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only 8 28 Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 1 Outline of Functions evecerivex Rer Xx esas X kG oes sooo eke es 9 3 9 11 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter 9 3 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter 9 4 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 0 eee eee ees 9 5 9 2 1 Specifications 5x S TI RP
13. Notes e If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH1 is invalid e If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence e If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 12 18 FPO Specifications 12 4 Table of System Registers Default Description value High speed Setting by Do not use high counter mode FP pro speed counter settings X0 to grammer II 2 phase input X0 x2 X1 2 phase input XO X1 Reset input X2 Incremental input X0 Incremental input X0 Reset input X2 Decremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 Individual input X0 X1 Individual input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Direction dicision X0 X1 Direction dicision X0 X1 Reset input X2 Do notuse high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 5857 Notes e If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH1 is invalid e If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence e If system register 400 to 403 have been set s
14. Number or channe Output range Output specifications anne 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 o 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 1 1 4 Link Units Product z Power supply Product name Specifications voltage No FPOCC his unit is for making the FPO function as a slave station of the CC Link 24V DC FPO CCLS AFP07943 Link Slave nly one unit can be connected to the furthest right edge of the FPO expansion bus Unit ote Accuracy will change if an FPO thermocouple unit is used at the same time For details please refer to the catalog or to the CC Link Unit manual FPO I O Link This is a link unit designed to make the FPO function as a station to MEWNET F 24V DC FPO IOL AFP0732 Unit remote I O system C NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for AFP 15402 adapter S2 connecting to a host computer via C NET It comes with a 30 cm FPO tool port type cable A power supply is not required for FPO side C NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for 100 to 240 V DC AFP8536 adapter connecting to a network connected PLC via C NET from a host computer 24V DC AFP8532 RS485 for com puter side 11 5 Power Supply Unit Product name Specifications FPO Power supply unit Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC Output 0 6 A 24 V DC FPO PSA1 Product No Overview FPO 11 Components 11 6 Op
15. 7 segmenet Timer elapsed Li ILI indicator value display 11111 111 PLC Timer number 1 Digital setting switches WX1 R1 HDF F81 BIN WX1 F80 BCD WYO Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IX 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by IX to BCD and output it to word external output relay WYO Precautions During Programming FPO 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the FPO control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT9000 The error address is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 Types of Operation Error Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified
16. 3 The FPO S LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring function FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply With the FPO S LINK control unit power must be supplied at two locations power supply connector and S LINK terminal block 4 3 1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector This is the power supply for the programmable controller section and the S LINK controller in the S LINK control unit 24V DC 150m4A 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block This is the power supply for the S LINK controller in the S LINK control unit and other S LINK input output devices to which power is supplied through the 24V OV line of the S LINK main cable The current consumption for the overall S LINK system is calculated by referring to the section entitled Determining the Power Supply in the S LINK Design Manual For standard purposes a power supply exceeding 24V DC 1 6 A should be selected Supply of power to S LINK terminal block Supplied to S LINK input output devices giv ov D Brown G Blue gi White ov Black From external power supply w next page 4 7 S LINK Control Unit 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply S LINK terminal block MC1 5 6 ST 3 5 Made by Phoenix Contact Co Terminal name Color of connecting cable Description Main wire for S LINK I O devices Ext
17. 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 5 Sample Program Wiring examples FPO Input terminal X0 Operation start X5 2 Encoder input Encoder Output terminal Operation Speed 0 5 000 Number of pulse LRL FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function Positioning operations with a single speed inverter When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops x5 R903A R102 R100 I pr H HK _ Positioning operations running R100 R100 R101 pF J Positioning operations start R101 Hu DMV KO DT 9044 F167 1 K 0 K 5000 vo R101 YO Start signal to inverter R903A R100 TO R102 DF Completion pulse H m 0 5 seconds R102 TMX 0 K5 High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function Wiring example FPO Input terminal Encoder input Operation X5 O start Encoder 7X Output terminal Inverter High speed YO switching Ya S peed 0 4 500 5 000 Number of pulse FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function Positioning operations with a
18. After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output timer L LF 183 DSTM S DH and R900D are set to on 32 bit Counter Decrements from the preset value n UP DOWN Increments or decrements from the preset value S counter based on up down input unt set I Note 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 12 58 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Basic function instructions On delay timer TML On delay timer TMR On delay timer TMX On delay timer TMY Auxiliary timer 16 bit Auxiliary timer 32 bit Counter UP DOWN counter Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 This instruction is available for FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later FPO T32C 12 59 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description Shift regis Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to ter the left Left right F119 Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and F119 LRSR 7 shift register LRSR D2 to the left or to
19. These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified posi tion in the character string 12 118 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP2 gt FP2SH D gt gt FP10SH Character strings instruction F257 N A P257 F258 N A P258 wn N A N A N A N A gt m m 2 gt N A N A N A N A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FP the P type high level instructions are not available 12 119 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Writing a character string toa character string Replacing character strings F270 Maximum value word P270 gata 16 bit Maximum value double word data 32 bit Boolean Operand Integer type data processing instructions Description These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the char acter string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the charac ter string Searches the maximum value in the word data table be tween the S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The ad dress relative to S 1 is stored in D 41 Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S 1 and S2 and stores it in th
20. mounting plates to be connected tighten the corner screws unit mm in 60 0 2 362 70 0 2 756 unit mm in Dimensions A 5 FPOFlatType Mounting Plate A 5 FPOFlat Type Mounting Plate 6 2 2 441 60 0 2 362 90 0 3 543 60 0 2 362 4 0 0 157 dir 10 0 0 394 2 2 0 087 unit mm in Mounting hole Dimensions when mounted on DIN rail dimensions 31 2 1 23 25 0 98 60 0 2 362 90 0 3 543 Y dir 5 0 0 197 7 36 2 1 43 30 1 18 unit mm in 55 Note Cannot be used if system is expanded FPO Dimensions A 6 Detailed Specifications of Cables A 6 Detailed Specifications of Cables E AFC8503 and AFC8503S For connection between FPO FP2 FP M and personal computer 3000 1500 118 110 5 9060 AFC8503S 16 0 24 Bros 15 984 006 Mini DIN 5 pin male mm inch D sub 9 pin male 32 0 d T Socket H
21. 5 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPO User s Manual eee Applicable PLC e FPO C10 FPO C14 e FP0 C16 e FP0 C32 e FPO T32 e FPO SL1 FPO E8 FPO E16 e FPO E32 y Y This manual was created using Adobe Acrobat A Adobe the Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks Adobe of Adobe Systems Incorporated FPO User s Manual ARCT1F389E 04 3 Smart Solutions by NAIS bttp www naispic com FPO Table of Figures Introduction This manual explains hardware configurations installation wiring procedures I O allocations and maintenance Before You Start FPO Before You Start Installation environment Do not use the unit where it will be exposed to the following Direct sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 3096 to 85 RH and sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corresive gas Excessive vibration or shock Excessive airborne dust or metal particles Water in any from including spray or mist Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Static electricity Cleaning In dry locations excessive static electri
22. 12 8 Table of Instructions Floating point type data arctangent operation Floating point type data natural logarithm Floating point type data exponent Boolean Operand Description TAN 1 S 1 S D 1 D LN 511 5 DH D EXP 4 S D 1 D Floating point type data logarithm Floating point type data power LOG S4 S DH D 5111 51 S2 1 S2 D 1 D Floating point type data square root 16 bit inte ger data to floating point type data conversion v 51 5 DH D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in up 32 bit inte ger data to floating point type data conversion Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by 511 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 12 128 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP2 gt FP2SH gt gt FP10SH Ie Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FP and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The instruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C 14 C16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 129 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions E a INT Floating point type data to RINT 16 bit inte ger conver sion the largest i
23. Dimensions A 7 Connection between RS232C port and PC Layout of Programming Port Pins Common for the FPO FP2 FP M 4 2 The controller s tool port is provided with the MD S5100 10 connector for FPO made by JST Mfg Co Ltd with the TCS7658 01 201 connector for FP M made by Hoshiden Corporation A 7 Connection between RS232C port and PC Connection example FPO RS232C port PC D SUB 9 pin female DOS V version Signal name CD RD SD Signal name SD RD SG ER SG DR RS CS co oOo U1 FPO Record of changes Record of changes J AN 1997 First edition JUL 1997 2nd edition Size change from A5 to B5 Newly addition of FP 0 transistor output type information J UN 1998 3rd edition Descriptions for FPO control units with RS232C port are added Descriptions for FPO inputonly and output only type expansion units are added Descriptions for FPO analog I O unit is added FEB 2004 4th edition Programming Manual Chapter 4 ACG M0084 3 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Addition Chapter 8 S LINK Control Unit ARCT1F263E Chapter 8 Connecting the Display Panel Delete Chapter 9 Trial Operation Record of changes FPO These materials are printed on ECF pulp These materials are printed with earth friendly vegetable based soybean oil ink PRI
24. 6 1 Adding Expansion Units oce EY x 6 3 pz pr Ioh de t pa br ee aisle oo E 6 5 6 3 Attachmentto DIN Rhone ree pE saa ea eruta 6 8 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 9 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 0 6 10 Chapter7 Wiring 7 1 Safety Instructions koe Rv Exe eels nex 7 3 7 1 1 Interlock Circuit acer e nhe e LE Cs 7 3 7 1 2 Emergency Stop Circuit 4x Een x dn 7 3 vi Table of Contents 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 1 3 Shar pSeglente o 7 14 Momentary Power Failures 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit eee Grounding Dab Prisca DOE ii Ete SE cf ddl SENSIS pcs 7 4 0 LED Equipped Reed Switch cc cece cece ee 7 4 3 TWOAWIFG Type Sensor enit gare aces 7 4 4 LED Equipped Limit Switch 0 ccc cece cence ees OUIUEWINAG es Sic ulti wets eae PE bel Aes SG kaa Ew eee Malet hee bate aes 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads 0 Wiring the Terminal Type esas durs waeeek Wir
25. C F Expansion I O Units FPO 3 2 Specifications 3 2 3 Output Specifications 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type FPO relay output types E8RS E8RM E16RS and E16RM Item Description Output type Normally open 1 Form A relay output Rated control capacity 2A 250 V AC 2 A 30V DC 4 5 A maximum per common at Resistance load Output points 4 points common per common 8 points common Response time OFF lt ON 10 ms Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED FPO Expansion I O Units 3 2 Specifications 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type FPO transistor output types E16T E16P E32T E32P E8YT E8YP E16YT E16YP Item Description Cd Insulation method optical coupler Output type open collector Rated load voltage NPN open collector type 5 to 24 V DC Note PNP open collector type 24 V DC Operating load voltage NPN open collector type 4 75 to 26 4 V DC range PNP open collector type 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 0 1A Max surge current 0 3A Output points fi 8 points common per common E32T 16 points common E32P E16YT E16YP OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less ON state voltage drop 1 5 V orless External power Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC supply for gii internal Current YO and Y1 5 mA 1 point except YO and Y1 3 mA 1 point circui Response time OFF ON 1msorless YO and Y1 only 50
26. Count n n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 i 3 2 1 0 High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function 2 phase input mode Incremental input CW on a he aq de osos dep d m Incremental decremental input mode separate input mode on on ge L 33 Count 0 1 2 3 14 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing SS Directional distinction mode on l on ae i Count 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 Increasing Decreasing 9 10 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 3 Allocation The inputting as shown in the table on section 9 2 1 will differ depending on the channel number being used The output turned on and off can be specified from Y 0 to Y 7 as desired with instructions F166 and F167 When using CHO with incremental input and reset input Count input Reset input X2 x On and off output Yn 5 The output turned on and off when values match can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired When using CHO with 2 phase input and reset input A phase input X0 B phase input X1 Reset input x2 x On and off output Th
27. EN 9 5 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions oo ete S tr LP EY he trad 9 7 9 3 High speed Counter Function zero ERE EXE DRE OC RE Rn 9 9 9 3 1 Outline of High speed Counter Function 9 9 9 3 2 Types of Input Modes eant t T Xa E Et tih dea io t 9 9 9 3 3 I O Allocation 4d as ore Re etek 9 11 9 3 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function 9 12 9 325 Sample Program secs sey Re de pee EEX M EUER 9 14 9 4 Pulse Output Function oye ce ie n Ee a rents 9 18 9 4 1 Outline of Pulse Output Function 9 18 9 4 2 Control Mode oido eek e ee tox 9 19 9 4 3 I O Allocation and Wiring cece eee eee 9 20 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function 9 22 9 4 5 Sample Program for Positioning Control 9 25 9 5 PWM Output US RU DE 9 33 9 5 1 Outline of PWM Output Function 9 33 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function 9 33 Chapter 10 General use Serial Communications 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 0000 10 3 10 1 1 General use Serial Communications sssuuuue 10 3 viii FPO Table of Contents 10 1 2 Data TFaDSIUSSIOELS C ee eaa e dw Ra dus 10 3 10 1 3 Data Reception Loi ages tesa RE PME 10 4 10 2 System Register Setting
28. Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Notes Y20 Y21 Y F E16YP u m of 00000000 finbgtintin ini aio Y28 Y29 e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e Thetwo terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 S LINK Control Unit Names and Functions 4 3 Specifications uir pbi Re Ec CR da 4 5 4 21 GeneralSpecifications 4 5 4 2 2 S LINK Controller Specifications 4 6 5 4 7 4 3 1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector 4 7 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block 4 7 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies 4 9 Operation W
29. 12 46 Specifications Slave sta tion con necting time error for MEW NET F system Selectable Description and steps to take The time required for slave station con nection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register 25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 12 7 Error Codes Operation error Remote I O commu nication error Selectable Selectable Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register 26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the FP2 FP2H and FP10SH Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90017 DT90018 to find the in struction address where the operation error occurred Then correct the pro gram In the FP3 Check the contents of special data reg isters DT9017 and DT9018 to find the instruction address where the opera tion error occurred Then correct the program Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at Operation error in the status display function S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR 1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication er ror is stored Selection of operation status using system register 27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO Selectable MEWNET
30. 8 10 8 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control EIS EPHCHO 19v eec bea 8 Precautions for Programming 8 Rewrite Function During RUN sssusa 8 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN 8 8 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not POSSIDIG oz ver ex X Reo 8 8 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite D ring RUN sioe eere Acco tee teeta Ya 8 8 7 4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer Il 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter D ring RUNI asus cose mes bans deste Ya 8 8 8 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer dy obs 8 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value inthe SetValue Area 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 8 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only o cone at Ro tc be ce 8 16 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 27 28 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 1 Use of Duplicated Output 8 1 Useof Duplicated Output 8 11 Duplicated Output Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a program If the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET or RST instruction or high level instruction for data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output conditi
31. Fo MV K120 DT201 F168 SPD1 Initial speed 120 Hz FOMV K2500 DT 202 DT202 Maximum speed 2500 Hz DT203 Acceleration decelera tion time 100 ms LLL LL LL uL F168 SPD1 DT200 HO Fo MV K100 DT 203 R903A R50 T4 R52 Dry H Home return completion pulse R52 TMX 4 K10 X4 or H FOMV H4 DT9052 Near home deceleration start a Fo MV HO DT9052 Near home sensor Home sensor side 4 side X3 on X4 on X0 on Motor o ee T co co 120Hz 0Hz X4 i Near Home 100 ms 100 ms home sensor sensor FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function JOG operation plus direction While X5 is in the on state a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y 2 does not turn on X5 rov num orxo DT300 Control code H112 Fo MV K 300 DT 301 ea F169PLS pT 300 Ho DT301 Speed 300 Hz side side x5 9 off Motor Cy gt 300 Hz 0 Hz JOG operation minus direction While X6 is in the on state a pulse is output from YO Atthis time directional output Y 2 turns on X6 ra Pak DT310 Control code H122 Fomv K300 pran n T F169PLS DT310 Ho DT311 Speed 300 Hz side side xe on off Motor 300 Hz PERS 0Hz Emergency stop over limit If X7 turns off while a pulse is being output from Y 0 the output of the pulse is stopped X
32. Internal resistor of limit switch KQ R Bleeder resistor kQ The OFF voltage of the FPO input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select R so that 24 24 the current will be greater than The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R or bs kQ 5 6 x l 2 4 Power supply voltage The wattage W ofthe resistor is W R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W Wiring FPO 7 5 Output Wiring 7 5 Output Wiring I Notes There is no fuse protection built into the output circuit Therefore in order to protect against overheating of the output circuitry caused by possible short circuits install an external fuse at each point However in cases such as short circuits the control unit itself may not be protected Be sure to select the thickness dia of the output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the output wiring is separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in Protect the outputs as described below 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When swit
33. Output 4 nput 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 10 16 4 16 Input 22 Output 20 Ex nput 6 Output 4 nput8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 10 16 8 8 nput 6 Output 4 nput 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 2 T4 ES 16 4 16 Input 24 Output 22 2s nput 8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 14 16 8 8 nput 8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 nput4 Output 4 8 10 16 16 8 nput 26 Output 24 nput 6 Output 4 nput 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 nput4 Output 4 14 16 16 8 nput 28 Output 26 nput 8 Output 6 nput 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 nput4 Output 4 E 10 16 16 16 nput 30 Output 28 e nput 6 Output 4 nput8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 a 14 16 16 16 nput 32 Output 30 A nput8 Output 6 nput8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 m 1 co FPO Overview 1 3 Combination Possibilities 13 2 Transistor Output Type Units Fi
34. S 2 41 S2 or 5111 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S 1 2 S 241 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S 1 2 S 2 41 S2 or 5111 51 5211 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S 1 S 241 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S 1 S 2 41 S2 or 5111 51 5211 S2 12 74 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability 32 bit data compare Start STD 32 bit data compare Start STD lt gt 32 bit data compare Start STD gt 32 bit data compare Start STD gt 32 bit data compare Start STD lt 32 bit data compare Start e A Available N A Not available 12 75 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description 32 bit data Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by compare comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition AND S141 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact s
35. Special functions Pulse catch input Interrupt input RS232C port Note 4 Only units with an RS232C port Total 6 points Not 0 to X1 50 us available X2 to X5 100 us Transmission speeds 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200bit s Transmission distance 3m 9 84ft Terminal block 3 pin made by phoenix Contact Co products number MKDS 1 3 3 5 Communication method Half duplex Periodical interrupt 0 5ms to 30s interval Constant scan Password Available Available High speed counter function Note 5 Counter mode Not Addition subtraction one phase Note 7 available Input point number Four channels maximum Maximum counting speed 10kHz maximum for all 4 channels Input contacts used X0 count input ch 0 X1 count input ch 1 L X2 reset input Note 8 X3 count input ch 2 X4 count input ch 3 L X5 reset input Note 8 Minimum input pulse width 50 us 10 100 us 5kHz Counter mode Not Two phase individual direction decision two phase available Input point number Two channels maximum Maximum counting speed 2kHz maximum for all 2 channels Input contacts used X0 count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 0 X4 count input ch 2 L X2 reset input L X5 reset input Minimum input pulse width iz 50 us lt 10kHz gt 100 us lt 5kHz gt 12 4 FPO Specifi
36. setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting For detailed about the system registers section 12 4 12 11 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers 12 4 Table of System Registers 12 4 1 System Registers System register area S ystem registers are used to setvalues parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Types of system register Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the leading counter number Hold types and non hold type settings System register 6 to 8 and 14 With the FPO the areas held in the event of a power supply interruption are fixed and the settings for system register 6 to 8 and 14 will be invalid Operation mode settings for errors System register 20 23 26 and 27 Set the operation mode effective when errors such as doplicated use of output operation and I O verification errors occur Time settings System register 31 and 34 Setthe time out error detection time and the constant scan time Input settings System register 400 to 403 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used as
37. tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting MEWTOCOL COM response control System registers 40 to No 47 changing 12 67 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Data compare instructions 16 bit data compare Start Description Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 S2 or 51252 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51252 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 252 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 5 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 S2 or 51 252 12 68 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Data compare instruction 16 bit data compare Start ST 16 bit data compare Start ST lt gt 16 bit data compare Start ST gt 16 bit data compare Start ST gt 16 bit data compare Start ST lt 16 bit data compare Start e A Available N A Not available 12 69 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table
38. 0 DH D Zone control 16 bit data ZONE PZONE When S3 0 53 S1 gt D When 320 0 D When S3 gt 0 S3 52 50 Zone control 32 bit data DZONE PDZONE When S3 1 S3 lt 0 5311 S3 5141 S1 51 D When 5311 53 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 5311 S3 5241 52 D 1 D 12 122 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability F282 P282 F283 P283 Integer type non linear function instructions F285 P285 gt FP2SH I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FP the P type high level instructions are not available 12 123 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Description BCD type real number operation instructions BCD type sine operation BCD type cosine operation BCD type tangent operation BCD type arcsine operation BASIN PBASIN SIN 51 5 D 1 D COS 511 5 DH D TAN 5 1 S D 1 D SIN 1 S4 S DH D BCD type arccosine operation BCD type arctangent operation BACOS PBACOS BATAN S D PBATAN COS 1 S 1 S D 1 D TAN 1 S 1 S D 1 D 12 124 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability C56 C16 C20 C32 BCD type real number operation instructions F300 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A
39. 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right rotate with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left rotate with carry flag R9009 data DRCL PDRCL Bit manipulation instructions F132 P132 16 bit data BTS D n bit reset PBTR 16 bit data D n PBTI T bit invert BTT PBTT 16 bit data bit test Description Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left to gether with carry flag R9009 data Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 1 Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 0 Invert the value of bit position n of the data of D Test the value of bit position n of the data of D and output the result to R 900B Number of on 1 bits in l bitdata PBCU Store the number of on bits in the data of S in D Number of on 1 bits in 32 bit data DBCU Store the number of on bits in the data of S 1 S in D 12 102 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions FP1 1 FP M 1 C56 C16 a UNI F128 P128 Bit manipulation instructions A A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high lev
40. After the return to home is completed the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 3 R903A R42 R40 Hor jy 1 J Home return operations running R40 R40 R41 Hor H Home return operation start R41 f H ro MV H123 DT200 DT200 Control code H123 refer to instruction Fo MV K100 DT201 F168 SPD1 Initial speed 100 Hz DT202 Maximum speed 2000 Hz DT203 Acceleration decelera tion time 150 ms Fomv K2000 pr202 rowv K150 DT203 F168 SPD1 DT 200 HO R903A Hd R42 FL Home return completion pulse TMX 3 K10 pF H FOMV H4 DT9052 Near home deceleration start Fo MV H0 DT9052 Near home sensor Home sensor side 4 side X3 on X4 on X0 on Home Near sensor home sensor High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Home return operation plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from YO and the return to home begins At this time directional output Y2 does not turn on Then when X4 turns on deceleration begins and when X0 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 x3 R903A R52 R50 or H Home return operations running R50 R50 R51 DF J Home return operation start R51 H ro MV H122 DT200 DT200 Control code H122 refer to instruction
41. H2 0010 Disable hardware reset H4 0100 Stop pulse output clear instruction H8 1000 Perform software reset and stop pulse output H9 1001 The 16 bits of DT9052 DT90052 are allocated in groups of four to high speed channels 0 to 3 as shown below bit 15 1211 87 43 0 DT90052 Y Y Y Y forch3 forch2 forchl forchO A hardware reset disable is only effective when using the reset inputs X2 and X5 In all other cases it is ignored When using pulse output a hardware reset input is equiv alentto an home point proximate input DT90053 Ss Clock calendar monitor hour minute Hour and minute data of the clock calendar are stored here This data is read only data it cannot be overwritten Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 BCD H0O to H59 BCD 12 34 FPO Specifications 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the calendar timer is stored The built in calen dar timer will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The calendar timer can be set the time set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the FO MV instruction Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Address FPO 32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT90054 Clock calendar monitor and setting minute second DT90055 Clock calendar monitor and setting day ho
42. Hor row H8 DT9052 Fo MV HO DT9052 Pulse output control clear High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Troubleshooting flowchart if a pulse is not output when instruction F168 SPD1 executed Yes No F168 SPD1 j Kj S pecial internal relay R903A or R903B is already on Remedy Yes problem Remedy Yes problem Remedy Yes problem Modify elapsed value No Control clear flag for special data regis ter DT9052 DT90052 is on No First word of data table is notse 1 or home return 2 No HSC CHO or CH1 is setto system register 400 Second word o No maximum speed Elapsed value tried to output pulse in forward direction at H7FFFFF Yes Yes No Fifth word of data target value or H7FFFFF Elapsed value tried to output pulse in reverse direction at HFF8000 Modify elapsed value Yes Yes No Set to home Yes return mode No Home input is already used by interrupt or HSC Yes No Please contact your dealer Set to absolute Yes mode No Absolute mode setting is target value elapsed value Yes Please contact your dealer No Please contact your dealer Not setto KO or K1 to incremental 0 absolute data table is setto 40 l
43. Link system error BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data Format error A command was received that does not fit the format No support error Multiple frames procedure error Link setting error Transmission time out error A command was received that is not supported A different command was received when processing multiple frames A route number that does not exist was specified Verify the route number by designating the transmission station Transmission to another device not possible because transmission buffer is congested Transmit disable error Busy error Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame processing Or cannot be received because command being pro cessed is congested Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used Data error Registration over error PC mode error There was a mistake in the contact data area data number desig nation size designation range or format designation Operation was done when number of registrations was exceeded or when there was no registration A command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN mode 12 50 Specifications External memory error Protect error Address error No program error and No data error 12 7 Error Codes Description
44. P300 Ie Note A Available N A Not available 12 125 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Description Floating point type real number operation instructions Floating point type data move Floating point type data addition Floating point type data subtraction Floating point type data multiplication Floating point type data division 51 S D 1 D S141 5S1 S24 S2 D 1 D 5111 51 5211 52 D 1 D 5111 51 x S24 52 DH D S1 1 S1 S24 S2 DH D Floating point type data sine operation Floating point type data cosine operation Floating point type data tangent operation Floating point type data arcsine operation Floating point type data arccosine operation SIN 51 5 DH D COS 511 S DH D TAN 51 S D 1 D SIN 1 511 S gt D 1 D COS 1 S41 S DH D 12 126 FPO Specifications i Availability Floating point type real number operation instructions 12 8 Table of Instructions A A N A N A N A N A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The instruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 127 Specifications FPO
45. PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Absolute value positioning operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from YO If the current value at that point is larger than 22 000 the direction output Y2 goes on and if the value is smaller than 722 000 the direction output Y 2 does is on xi R903A R32 Hor 4 i Positioning operations running R30 R30 R31 DF Positioning operations start Ral DT100 Control code H112 H FOMV H112 DT 100 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 DT101 Initial speed 200 Hz Fo MV K200 DT 101 FOMV K4000 DT 102 Maximum speed OMV K250 DT103 4000 Hz Acceleration decelera tion time 250 ms F DMV K22000 DT 104 FOMV KO DT 106 Target value 22000 F168 SPD1 DT 100 HO Pulse stop R903A R30 T2 R32 Hor JH Positioning completion pulse 1 s R32 TMX 2 K10 side side T G I e 10 000 22 000 30 000 4000 Regardless ofthe current value its movement is towards position 22 000 200Hz 0Hz 250 ms 250 ms FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Home return operation minus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from YO and the return to home begins At this time directional output Y 2 turns on Then when X4 turns on deceleration begins and when turns on home return is completed
46. Printout instruction Turns on while a F147 PR instruction is executed flag Turns off when a F147 PR instruction is not executed R9034 Rewrite during RUN This is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following flag the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode CPU Ver 2 1 or later available S LINK com Turns on when the S LINK error ERR 1 3 or 4 occurs using S LINK sys munication error tem flag S LINK communi Turns on when communication is taking place with an S LINK input output cation status flag unit RS232C communi Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs cation error flag RS232C reception Turns on when a terminator is received during the serial data communicating completed flag RS232C trans Turns on while data is not send during the serial data communicating ME completed Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data communicating High speed counter Turns on while the high speed counter instruction F166 HC1S to F170 control flag forchO PWM is executed High speed counter Turns on while the high speed counter instruction F166 HC1S to F170 control flag forch1 PWM is executed High speed counter Turns on while the high speed counter instruction F166 HC 1S to F170 control flag forch2 PWM is executed High speed counter Turns on while the high speed counter instruction F166
47. S241 52 DH D PD D result in 32 bits BCD arithmetic instructions 4 digit BCD data addition 8 digit 0 1 D 541 S D 1 D BCD data addition 4 digit S2 S1 S2 D BCD data addition 8 digit DB 192 141 51 S2 1 2 D 1 D m 4 digit BCD data PB subtraction F46 8 digit DB D 1 D 551 S D 1 D Pe PURUS MA F47 4 digit B 51 52 D S1 S2 D 7 A WO ee 12 86 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 FP M 1 BCD arithmetic instructions F40 A A A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 87 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions H Boolean Operand 8 digit DB BCD data x subtraction BDB B 4 digit BCD data multiplication Description 5111 S1 S2 1 52 DH D S1 x S2 D 1 D 8 digit BCD data multiplication 4 digit BCD data division 8 digit BCD data division 4 digit BCD data increment 5111 S1 x S2 1 52 D 3 D 2 D 1 D S1 52 quotient D remainder DT9015 for FP O FP e FP 1 FP M F P3 or DT90015 for FPO T32 F P Z FP2 FP2SH FP 10S H 141 S1 5211 52 quotient D 1 D remainder DT9016 DT9015 for FPO FP e FP 1 FP M FP3 or DT90016 DT90015 for FPO T32 FP X F P 2
48. T32CT control unit 10 k step type can be changed by the system registers The number of points in the table is the value when the system registers are initial values 7 The max counting speed 10kHz is the counting speed with a rated input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of 25 C The counting speed frequency will decrease depending on the voltage and temperature 8 If both reset inputs XO and X1 are reset X2 will be the reset input of X1 In the same way for X3 and X4 X5 acts as the reset input of X4 9 With a CPU of Ver 1 2 or a subsequent version the frequency will be 0 15Hz to 1kHz 10 The maximum is 9 5kHz when the positioning control instruction F168 is executed 11 Precautions when using the battery backup function Secondary chargeable battery is used as backup battery in the FPO T32C control unit The battery is not charged before the unit is shipped so please make sure that the built in backup battery have been charged before using the unit 12 The program system registers and the hold type areas internal relay data register and counter are backed up by the built in EEPROM 13 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 100 000 or less 14 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 10 000 or less 12 6 FPO Specifications 12 2 1 0 Allocation Table 12 2 1 0 Allocation Table FPO Control Units The I O
49. Table of Contents FPO Table of Contents Chapterl Overview Db Componentes Reb etaed 1 3 1 1 1 FPO Control UNDIS Liy6v9l x 9 Rx RR EURERVWen WE CETRERSS 1 3 1 1 2 FPO Expansion Units urne es dese ete estre e de 1 4 1 15 ptite been ette Rhen 1 5 1 5 1 1 5 ABOWOELSUDD 1 5 1 1 6 Options and Additional Parts 0 1 6 1 2 Expansion Possibilities bee week cae EUR NER 1 7 1 3 Combination Possibilities ter yarn rex rH ye 1 8 1 3 1 Relay Output Type Units 1 8 1 3 2 Transistor Output Type Units cuc icn chee ek rr REOR HR 1 9 1 4 Programming Tool Si aic iacit a a bua we hereto ul tc x eut 1 10 Chapter2 Control Units 2 1 Parts and Terminology sd aret ip oe oed pras 2 3 21 Control Unit LyBeS riser oec c tee liue da 2 4 2 1 1 1 Status Indicator LEDS died ERR ends 2 6 2 1 1 2 Mode Switch ex Rr LIRE A RS 2 6 2 1 1 3 ORE ED 2 6 pru RAPERE ETSI E RE dE 2 7 oe d petens 2 7 2 2 1 1 Weight E 2 7 2 2 1 2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit 2 8 2 2 2 Performance Specifications uuan 2 10 2 2 3 JInpatSpecilcalloliS cnc vs os 2 14 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number
50. leading edge differential instructions Count input for CT instructions Count input for F118 UDC instructions Shift input for SR instructions Shift input for F119 LRSR instructions NSTP instructions Leading Edge Detection Method An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on Standard operation Leading edge differential operation Trigger Trigger ot on on Operation of Operation of off instruction instruction i Executed only one time Executed every scan The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed Precautions During Programming FPO 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method Precautions When Using an Instruction Which Performs Leading Edge Detection When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected The instruction is not executed Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on section 8 5 2 When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the i
51. various ming tools various memories Note 11 memories Counters Counters 16 points Memory 16 points areas Internal re which can Internal re lays 128 bespeci lays 128 points fied points Date Timers Date registers Counters registers 32 words Internal re 32 words Note 14 lays Data Note 14 registers next page I Notes 1 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 2 The proportion of timer points to counter points can be changed using a system register 5 12 5 Specifications FPO 12 1 Performance Specifications Notes 3 Precision of calender timer At O0 C 32 F less than 139 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 72 seconds error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 169 seconds error per month This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation coefficient value based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of 5V and the battery backup voltage of 3V Also F157 and F158 time date addition and subtraction instructions cannot be used 4 When using the RS232C port for communication we recommend using resend processing The driver IC for the RS 232C is in full conformance with EIA TIA 232E and CCITT V 28 standards 5 The combinations 1 phase x 2 channels and 2 phases x 1 channel are also possible for the high speed counter 6 The internal relay data register and timer counter hold areas of the
52. 1 008 points RO to R62F 1 008 1 008 points RO points RO to R62F to R62F Note 1 Special internal 64 points R9000 to R903F relay R Timer Counter 144 points initial setting is 100 timer points TO to T99 44 counter T C points C100 to C143 Note 2 Timer range 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s selected by instruction Data register 1 660 words DTO to DT1659 6 144 16 384 6 144 DT words words words DTO to DTO to DTO to DT6143 DT16383 DT6143 Note 1 Special data 112 words DT9000 to DT9111 112 words 112 words register DT DT90000 DT9000 to to DT90111 DT9111 Index register 2 words IX IY Differential points DF DF Unlimited of points Master control relay points MCR 32 points Number of labels J P and LOOP 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels 12 3 Specifications FPO 12 1 Performance Specifications Number of step ladders Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C16P C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C10CRM CI4CRM C16CP Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 sub routines Number of interrupt programs 7 programs external 6 points internal 1 point point Self diagnosis function 128 stages 704 stages 128 Note 1 stages 16 sub routines 1 program internal 1 Such as watchdog timer program syntax check Clock calender function Not available Available Not Note 3 available
53. AF P 0804 and install according to the dimensions shown below For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FPO flat type mounting plate see section A 5 FPO flat type mounting plate 9 w 9 i Mounting panel erg pO leur Q m N AFPO804 E 4 o Procedure 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit 2 Install the FPO unit on the FPO flat type mounting plate 3 Align the expansion hooks with the plate and press the hooks back down E 3 FPO flat type mounting EI MEM plate e EJ E i 1y xp Notes e The FPO flat type mounting plate AFP0804 cannot be used for an expansion unit w nextpage FPO Installation 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate e An FPO unit with an attached FPO flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail DIN rail FPO flat type mounting plate Installation FPO 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 8 7 9 Safety Instructions iex cere e pe teres 7 1 1 Interlock reds 9e 7 1 2 7 1 3 StartUp Sequence a cani etc ra 7 1 4 Momen
54. An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc orROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mis take in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered Rewrite during RUN error SIM over error When inputting with the programming tool software editing of an instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that can not perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU Program area was exceeded during a program write process Exclusive access control error A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same time as a command being processed 12 51 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions 12 8 Table of Instructions 12 8 1 Table of Basic Instructions Boolean Symbol Description Se
55. C14CRS FP02223C Control Unit Sink S ourse with common RS232C Molex connector PO C14CRM AFP02213C port EEPROM Input 8 24V DC Transis MIL connector PO C16T AFP 02343 2 7k steps Output 8 Sink S ourse uput xcommon 0 1A FPO C16 Control Unit Transi P0 C16P FP02353 uput lA EEPROM Input 8 24V DC i MIL connector PO C16CT FP02343C FPO C16 2 7k steps Output 8 Sink Sourse Control Unit xcommon with RS232C i PO C16CP FP02353C port EEPROM Input 16 24V DC T i MIL connector P0 C32T FP02543 5k steps Output 16 Sink Sourse FPO C32 common Control Unit T i P0 C32P FP02553 EEPROM Input 16 24V DC T i MIL connector P0 C32CT FP02543C FPO C32 5k steps Output 16 Sink Sourse Control Unit common with ee RS232C i P0 C32CP FP02553C port 32 Input 16 24V DC T i MIL connector P0 T32CT FP02643C Control Unit 10k steps Output 16 Sink Sourse with xcommon RS232C port and Ex Clock Cal 0 T32CP AFP02653C endar func tion FPO S LINK EEPROM Input 64 Terminal block AFP02700 Control Unit 5k steps Output 64 with S LINK RS232C section port Overview FPO 1 1 1 1 2 Product name FPOE8 Expansion Unit Components FPO Expansion Units Specifications Number of points Input 8 Input 4 Output 4 Input 8 Power s
56. CT counter instruction CT 100 X1 Add R9014 XO R9014 Lj CT 100 X1 RUN Power on X0 CT100 counting M operation Even if XO was initially on the input condition X0 for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented Precautions During Programming FPO 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction Instructions which leading edge detection compare the condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution and execute the instruction only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE J P or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on inputtiming Take care regarding this point il Example 1 Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions m e 0 X1 YO JS MCE 0 Time chart 1 X0 X1 YO of DF The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has instruction not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 x YO Previous execution of DF instruction The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the t
57. DT90106 DT90105 DT90107 CH3 DT9108 DT9110 DT9109 DT9111 DT90108 DT90110 DT90109 DT90111 CHO DT9044 DT9046 DT9045 DT9047 CH2 DT90044 DT90046 DT90045 DT90047 DT9104 DT9106 DT9105 DT9107 DT90104 DT90106 DT90105 DT90107 gas Note Reset input X2 can be setto either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items Table of pulse output function specifications Related Input output contact number being used Built in Performance Memory area used Direc put tional out high speed counter channel Elapsed Target no DT9052 DT90052 lt bit2 gt DT9044 DT9045 DT90044 DT90045 DT9046 DT9047 DT90046 DT90047 specifications for maximum output fre quency Max 10 kHz for 1 point output Max 5 kHz for instruc tions FO MV F1 DMV F168 SPD1 F169 PLS DT9052 DT90052 lt bit6 gt DT9048 DT9050 DT9049 DT9051 DT90048 DT90050 DT90049 DT90051 2 point output g Note The maximum 1 point output for instruction F168 SPD1 is 9 5 kHz Table of PWM output specifications Output number being used Built in high speed counter channel no Related instructions Memory area used Performance specifications for output Control flag frequency
58. Default Description value RS232C Communication method Using programming tool software port setting for RS232C port Select items from the menu setting Using FP programmer II K0 RS232C port is not used K1 Computer link mode when connecting C NET K2 Serial data communication mode gen eral port Communication format Using programming tool software zewng or RS232C porti Select items from the menu vei item Default setting Using FP programmer II Gta code None e the setting contents using H con Terminal code CR 15 6 Parity check With odd L Data length 8 bits Start code 0 NoSTX 1 5 Terminal code 00 CR 01 CR LF 10 None 11 Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits Parity check 00 None 01 With odd 11 With even Data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits 415 416 417 418 Baud rate Setting by 19200 bit s setting for programming 9600 bit s RS232C port tool software 4800 bit s 2400 bit s 1200 bit s 600 bit s 300 bit s Unit number setting for K1 to K32 unitNo 1 to 32 RS232C port when connecting C NET Modem compatibility setting Using programming tool software for RS232C port Select items from the menu Using FP programmer II H0 Modem disabled H8000 Modem enabled Starting address setting for C10C C14C C16C K0 to K1659 reception buffer C32C SL1 KO to K6143 T32C KO to K 16383 Capacity C10C C14C K1660 KO to K1660 setting for C16C reception buffer C3
59. Description Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by 5 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example K100 H100 Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in D 1 D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by 51 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D 16 bit data invert com plement of 1 Inverts each bit of data of D 16 bit data complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 F87 16 bit data ABS D 8 absolute PABS Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign Gives the absolute value of the data of D 12 94 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 FP I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 95 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions inn E j 32 bit data DABS absolute PDABS 16 bit data sign extension Decode DECO da 3 F9
60. Description value High speed Setting by Do not use counter mode FP pro high speed settings X3 to grammer II counter X5 2 phase input X3 X4 2 phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X5 Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Direction dicision X3 X4 Direction dicision X3 X4 Reset input X5 Do notuse high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 I Notes e If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH3 is invalid e If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH3 takes precedence e If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 12 21 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers Address Default value Description X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 0 Standard input 0 0 0 1 Pulse catch input In FP Programmer II enter the above set tings in hexadecimal When X3 and X4 are set to pulse catch input 15 0 402 19901
61. ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking lt Condition gt The self diagnostic error occurs lt Procedure 1 gt Check the error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR In the ONLINE mode select Monitor from the menu bar of FPWIN GR And then select Status Display Atthe PLC Error Flag field self diagnostic error code is displayed Using FP programmer II Press the keys on the FP programmer II te SJ C JG C e C8 as shown on the right When self diagnostic error occurs the OP 110 screen shown on the right is displayed FUNCTION ERR E45 Error code is 1 to 9 Condition There is a syntax error in the program Procedure 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Procedure 2 Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method next page 11 5 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting Error code is 20 or higher lt Condition A sel d agnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Procedure Use the programming toolin PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWIN GR Cickthe Clear Error buttoni nthe status dsplaymenu descri bedonthe prev ous page Using FP programmer II Press the keys as shown onthe right SHIFT 9 L UJ GJ 9 89 GS Error code 43 and Higher can be cl
62. I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 2 EI6RS E16RM E16RM x20 X0 7 m a o iba a lao X27 o a lea COM aa 8 9 Lo Y20 wl bo e ha c 55 o 15 70 Y27 8 Load COM Load Load 08 08 08 supply 555 Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 3 E16T X21 COM Output 21 Load Load Load Load Im Notes e Thetwo COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number gi
63. Inch screw 4 40 0 2 Pin Nc Personal computer sise Signal name SG PLCside 1 Signal Tin sa 1 50 2 RD 4 B 4 D 5 FG B o o o vu a mm inch T CM TM 2 p A t Mini DIN 5 pin male D sub 25 pin male 47 04 Personal 4 1 852 PLCside 1 2 sise Signal Tin No Pio Signal FG B B ha t FON _ SG 1 7 SG Ub SD 2 3 RD H RD 3 2 SD 30004 1500 hi D 4 4 AS 118 110 5 2080 sv 5 5 cs 4 5 p 6 DR 2 3 8 CD CORN UH dE Ti E AFC8521 AFC8523 For connection between FPO FP2 FP M and FP programmer mm inch M iE M E L J M2 6 screw z L mm inch lt i HN E AFC8521 11000275 39 3702 AFCB523 1300017 1181115999 33 32 1 312 Mini DIN 5 pin male D sub 15 pin female PLC side 1 2 AA sda FG B 5 FG Sa 1 SG 55 2 3 A RD 3 kj n SD 5 4 em od 15V EI s fo SG
64. R9000 to R903F based on specific conditions and is used as a flag Memory External input WX 13 words Code for specifying 16 external Areas relay WX0 to WX12 input points as one word 16 bits of data External output WY 13 words Code for specifying 16 external relay WYO to WY 12 output points as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay 63 words Code for specifying 16 internal Note 1 WRO to WR 62 relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register 1 660 words 6 144 words 16 384 words Data memory used in program Note 1 DTO to DTO to Data is handled in 16 bit units DT1659 DT6143 one word Timer Counter 144 words Data memory for storing a set value area SVO to V143 target value of a timer and an in Note 1 itial value of a counter Stores by timer counter number Timer Counter EV 144 words Data memory for storing the elapsed value area EVO to EV143 elapsed value during operation Note 1 of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number Special data 112 words 112 words Data memory for storing register DT9000 to DT9111 DT90000 specific data Various settings to DT90111 and error codes are stored Index register IX 2 words IX IY Register can be used as an ad IY dress of memory area and con stants modifier Constant Decimal con K K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation PARS K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constant H
65. Specifications FPO 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT90108 DT9108 High speed counter elapsed value area for ch3 DT90109 DT9109 Description The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9108 and DT9109 DT90108 and DT90109 The value can be written by executing a DMV F1 in struction DT90110 DT9110 High speed counter target value area for ch3 DT90111 DT9111 The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instruc tions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset va lues can only be read and cannot be written 12 38 FPO Specifications 12 7 Error Codes 12 7 Error Codes Error Confirmation When ERROR LED Turns ON When the ERROR LED ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit CPU unit turns on a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the
66. V DC LA 5VDC a 24VDC lh ire Ratedload External voltage power supply e s e Q e for driving internal circuit Ime Note The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 4 2 PNP Open Collector Type E8YP E 16YP FPO E8YP E16YP MT 4 C Output side Internal Y20 Load e circuit Internal Yer Load e circuit a 24V DC 9 I Note The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 1 E8RS E8RM E8RS XR 20 o o e zol X23 ooe Ks 75 COM 6 Y0 3 Y20 Note Ee bail Y23 Load Load 9 COM Load e Load 9 Power supply e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion
67. Y21 55 28 29 HEIL 12 Load Load Load eile Dis Load Load Load 9 Bn E 5 so er Load Load Load 9 Rees Load Load Load j 9 H m ex CL SESS e The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The two terminals of output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The two terminals of the output terminals are internally connected however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 7 E8X E8X 0 7 Input X20 X21 9 a o NESERNE COM COM Note 1 DDOODGOUOU Notes e The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage
68. YO CHO R903A Frequency 0 15 Hz to 38 Hz CPU ver 2 0 or Yl CHI R903B later 100 to 1 kHz Duty 0 1 96 to 99 9 96 FO MV F1 DMV F170 PWM FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions Channel The same channel cannot be used by more than one function Example of prohibited application You cannot share CHO with the high speed counter and pulse output functions 1 0 number input output contact point The number allocated to each function cannot be used for normal input or outputs Example of prohibited application When using CHO for 2 phase inputting with the high speed counter function you cannot allot XO and X1 to normal inputs When using Y 0 for the pulse output function you cannotallotorigin input X0 to a normal input When using YO for the pulse output with directional output operating function you cannot allot Y 2 directional output to a normal input or output When using the high speed counter with a mode that does notuse the reset input you can allot the inputs listed in parenthesis in the specifications table to a normal input Example of allowable application When using the high speed counter with no reset input and 2 phase input you can allot X2 to a normal input Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F170 When any of the instructions related to the high speed counter F166
69. a special input Tool port settings System register 410 411 and 414 Setthe tool port parameters when computer link will be used RS232C port settings System register 412 to 418 Only applicable for unit with RS232C port Modem connection setting System register 411 Setto Modem connection when the tool port will be used for modem communication 12 12 Specifications 12 4 Table of System Registers Checking and changing system register settings S ystem register values parameters can be set with K or H constants If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need to write it again Using programming tool software Procedure 1 Setthe mode of the FPO control unit to PROG 2 Select the SYSTEM REGISTER in PLC CONFIGURATION option from the menu 3 Select the function to be set in the SYSTEM REGISTER in PLC CONFIGURATION screen The value set in the selected system register will appear 4 To change a set value write the new value as indicated in the system register table 5 Itdoes OK and resistration is done Using FP programmer II Procedure 1 Setthe mode of the FPO control unit to PROG 2 Press the keys on the FP programmer II as shown below HODE 3 Specify the register number e g No 20 for the parameter to be set and read the parameter The value set in the selected register will be displayed 4 To change the set v
70. addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is be ing attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available 12 42 FPO Specifications 12 7 Error Codes J Table of Self Diagnostic Error Description and steps to take Probably a hardware abnormality CPU error Stops Please contact your dealer E20 E21 RAM error 1 E22 RAM error 2 Probably an abnormality in the internal E23 RAM error 3 Stops RAM E24 RAM error 4 Please contact your dealer E25 RAM error 5 FP e FPO and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is de User s tected try to operate with another Stops h ROM error memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is notinstalled ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is FP10SH larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Units installed exceed the limitations Unit instal i e 4 or more link units lation error Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual Probably an abnormality in the system System register register hr Check the system regi
71. allocation of the FPO control unit is fixed Type of Control Unit 1 0 number C10 series Input 6 points X0 to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 Input 8 points X0 to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 8 points to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 Input 16 points to XF Output 16 points YOto YF C14 series C16 series C32 T32 series S LINK Control Units The I O allocation of the S LINK control unit is fixed Ut roo S LINK address Input 64 points X80 to X8F 0 to 15 X90 to X9F 16to 31 X100 to X10F 32 to 47 X110 to X11F 48 to 63 Y80 to Y 8F 64 to 79 Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95 Y100 to Y 10F 96 to 111 Y110 to Y 11F 112to 127 Output 64 points FPO Expansion Units The allocation of the FPO expansion unitis determined by order of connection number First expansion Type of Expansion Unit Second expansion X40 to X47 X40 to X43 40 to Y 43 Third expansion X20 to X27 X20 to X23 Y20 to Y23 X60 to X67 X60 to X63 Y60 to Y63 E8X Input 8 points E8R Input 4 points Output 4 points E8YR E8YT E8YP E16R E16T E16P E16YT E16YP E32T E32P X40 to X47 Y40 to Y47 40 to Y 4F X40 to X4F 40 to Y 4F Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 X60 to X67 Y60 to Y67 Y 60 to Y6F X60 to X6F Y 60 to Y 6F Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F 12 7 Specifications FPO 12 2 1 0 Allocatio
72. and the data is transmitted to an external device For information on start and terminal code settings see section 10 2 Executing the F144 TRNS instruction turns off the transmission completed flag R9039 Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 TRNS instruction is being executed Check the transmission completed flag R9039 to determine whether duplex transmission is possible 10 10 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function 11 3 11 1 1 Allowing Duplicated Output 11 4 11 1 2 Continuing After an Operation Error 11 4 11 2 Troubleshooting sud cane one EI ovo poten ex er en dir 11 5 11 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking 11 5 11 22 ERROR ALARM LED IS ON ces 11 7 11 2 3 All LEDs are OFF oo zoe seu zocken 11 7 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction 11 8 11 25 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed 11 10 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 10 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function The FPO control unit has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary When an error occurs the status of the status indicator LEDs on the FPO control unit vary as shown in the table
73. comparative condition OR 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 S2 or 91252 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51552 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 S2 or S1 S2 12 72 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability 16 bit data compare OR OR 16 bit data compare OR OR 16 bit data compare OR OR 16 bit data compare OR OR gt 16 bit data compare OR OR lt 16 bit data compare OR e A Available N A Not available 12 73 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description 32 bit data Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in compare the comparative condition S1 1 51 52 1 S2 Start Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S 1
74. data is outside the possible range Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs However when you set system register 26 to continuation KI the FPO control unit operates even if an operation error occurs For detailed information we section 12 4 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors Procedure 1 Checkthe location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT9017 and DT9018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clearthe error Use a programming tool to clear the error If the mode selector is setto RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared In FP Programmer press the following keys C n 1 J 1 2 ESI CS An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a F148 self diagnostic error set instruction Precautions During Programming FPO 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 4 Points to Check in Program Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register Example When a data register is modified using an i
75. data of S is written to the buffer starting from D Counts up or down from the value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in D Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area between D1 and D2 as the register Rotate the n bits in data of D to the right 16 bit data left rotate Rotate the n bits in data of D to the left 16 bit data right rotate with carry flag R9009 data Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the right 16 bit data left rotate with carry flag R9009 data Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the left 12 100 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions gt FP2SH Availability FP1 1 FP LED 16 C20 32 i dL F117 N A P117 Basic function instructions N A A A A I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 101 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions ial K 32 bit data DROR D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double 5 right rotate PDROR words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right F126 32 bit data DROL D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the double 5 p126 left rotate PDROL words data
76. error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number i Change to PROG mode and correct the S program so that one relay is not used for error two or more OT instructions and KP in structions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double out put permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump J P and LBL one 3 instruction is either missing or in an incor Not paired rect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program Parameter does not agree with the timer counter mismatch range setting error Change to PROG mode check the sys tem register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written to a specific area main program area or sub program area has been written to a differ Program ent area for example a subroutine SUB to area error RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the
77. il Example Writing the contents of word external input relay WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RO H Fo my K0 IX J Q R1 EMDF FO Mv WX3 IXDTO 1 F35 1 IX When RO turns on is written to index register IX When the R1 turns on the contents of WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IXDTO Add 1to In this case the contents of IX will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times Contents of Destination of R1 IX data register Inputting and Outputting Data Based on a Number Specified by an Input il Example 1 Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch PLC Timer 2 O17 1 9 1 4 Timer set value setting timer time setting number Lee WX0 L Digital switches FPO Precautions During Programming 8 3 Handling Index Registers RO HDF F81 BIN WX1 IX F81 BIN WX0 IXSVO Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IX 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and stored in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of IX n i Example 2 External output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch amaa
78. is deleted in block b the condition before the re write will be held If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on status To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output High level instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the re write will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instruc tions are preset in all of the corresponding S V s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the re write will be held When writing MC MCE in structions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write itto an address which follows the ED in struction An interrupt program is a program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an ad dress which follows the ED instruction If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT in structions are presetin all ofthe corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do notchange In the case of FP Programmer set values can be rewritten
79. mum value Description Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S 1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 FMEAN PFMEAN FSORT PFSORT Floating point type data total and mean values Floating point type data sort Time series processing instruction PID process ing Compare instructions F373 16 bit data revision pos detection F374 32 bitdata revision db detection DTR PDTR DDTR PDDTR The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are ob tained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 42 The real number data from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to 52 and S to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the pre vious execution If the data in the 32 bit area specified by 541 S has changed since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data
80. of Simultaneous Input POINTS iere aede te cue 15 2 2 4 Output Specifications se ev x dees DER CE mx Ya 2 16 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type 2 16 2 2 4 2 Transistor Output T VOCs cera tra seed ad 2 17 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 210 eases ae tee t a od cape seme et dus 2 18 2 3 1 Relay Output Type C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C PS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM n n I 18 2 3 2 Transistor Output TYDe suis ner rx er 5 19 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type CIeT CIOCT C32TJC 32GTITS2CT aaa 2 19 2 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type CIGPICIOCPIC 32PJC 326 PTT 32 CP ius lease etwas 2 21 FPO Table of Contents 24 PINE OVOUNS E 2 22 2 4 1 5 5 2 22 2 4 2 CI4RS CIACRS CIARM CIACRM 2 22 24 3 CCIBTIGCIOCT xe ts rex e cess Ex POP EC 2 23 24501 GIOPICIDCP dodo RP SORS 2 24 243 9 tnd hack dii RD RUPES Belt 2 25 20 32PIC32GRITS2GB add cai nbd tae aiid tec rra a ebd 2 26 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type is ve Ead Eos 2 27 Chapter3 Expansion I O Units 3 1 Parts and Terminology esse dara ed poU ties call eke pet a oe 3 3 3 1 1 Expansion l O Unit Types e CE IPC 3 4 isa rudimenta e fato e tart Raa 3 6 3 2 1 General Speclrcallolis o vert
81. of the previous execu tion 12 136 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Number Availability Time series processing instruction ERR E l 1 Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 For the FPO the instruction is available for the T32C and C10 C14 C16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 137 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Description Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the index regis ter bank number Changing the index register bank num ber F412 Restoring P412 the index register bank num ber File register bank processing instructio Index register 10 to ID bank number change over Index register 10 to ID bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number Changes index register 10 to ID bank number back to the bank before F411 CHGB P411 PCHGB instruction ns Setting the file register bank number File register bank number change over Changing the file reg ister bank number File register bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number Restoring the file reg ister bank number Changes file register bank number back to the bank before F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction 12 138 FP
82. points YO to Y7 321 C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP Input 16 points to XF Output 16 points YOto YF S LINK Control Unit The I O allocation of the S LINK control unit is fixed S LINK address Input 64 points X80 to X8F 0 to 15 X90 to X9F 16to 31 X100 to X10F 32 to 47 X110 to X11F 48 to 63 Output 64 points Y 80 to Y 8F 64 to 79 Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95 Y100 to Y 10F 96 to 111 Y110 to Y 11F 112 to 127 FPO 1 0 Allocation 5 3 Expansion I O Unit 5 3 Expansion I O Unit Up to three expansion units can be added I O numbers do not need to be set as allocation is performed automatically by the FPO control unit when an expansion I O unitis added The 1 0 allocation of expansion I O unit 26 is determined by the installation location Ee Third expansion Second expansion First expansion Control unit 1 0 number Type Second T First expansion expansion Third expansion ESRS ESRM Input points Output 4 point Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F Output 16 points Y 20 to Y2F Y 40 to Y 4F Y 60 to Y 6F A21 Input channel 0 16 WX2 4 WX6 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Input channel 1 16 WX3 WX5 WX7 points X3
83. programmable controller lt Procedure gt Enter a password in the password setting menu in the FP WIN GR software and se lect enable 1 In the menu select Tool T and then Set PLC Password P 2 The PLC password setting dialog box appears shown below Select the Access radio button enter the password and then click the Settings button ond Lintitle2 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error has occurred Procedure Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method 11 10 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 5 12 3 12 2 WO Allocation Table oe bp tes 12 7 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 10 12 4 Table of System Registers cece eee 12 12 12 4 1 5 12 12 12 4 2 Content of System Register Settings 12 14 12 4 3 Table of System Registers 12 16 12 5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 26 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 29 TAT Error CodeS conste 12 39 12 8 Table of InstrucHols bre e pei 12 52 12 8 1 Table of Basic Instructions 12 52 12 8 2 Table of High level Instructions 12 80 12 9
84. special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 9 24 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 5 Sample Program for Positioning Control Wiring example Input terminal Home sensor X0 Positioning start X1 e e Positioning start X2 O O e Home return start x3 Oo O Near home sensor X4 Forward J OG start X5 Oo O e Reverse JOG start X6 O O Overrun X7 Lil d b contact a contact b contact Stepping motor Moving table side side Stepping motor driver Output terminal COM Pulse output YO Pulse input COM 1 Directional output Directional input e e ADS P T note e 24 V DC power supply Ie Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V photo coupler type connect a 2 KO 1 4 W resistor High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Relative value positioning operation plus direction When X1 turns on a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y 2 does not turn on xi R903A R12 Hor H Positioning operations running R10 R10 R11 DF J Positioning operations start DT100 Control code H102 H FUMV T1292 DT refer to instruction Fo MV K500 DT 101 F168 SPD1 Initial speed 500 Hz DT102 Maximum speed 5000 Hz FO MV K5000 DT
85. supply connector Current Consumed by the Control Unit Input circuit The current consumed by the input circuits of the various units The value indicates the current that flows into the input circuit n indicates the number of points that are on Output circuit The current consumed by the output circuits of the various units The value indicates the current used to drive the output circuit n indicates the number of points that are on The value does not include the load current value 25 8mA or less 34 4mA or less FPO C16 32 32 FPO E8X FPO E8R 100mA or less 40mA or less 60mA or less FPO SL1 150mA or less 15mA or les 50mA or less 34 4mA or less 28mA or less 68 8mA or less 52mA or less 34 4mA or less FPO E8YR FPO E8YT P 10mA or less 100mA or less 17 2mA or less 24mA or less FPO E16X 68 8mA or less FPO E16R FPO E16T P 25mA or 100mA or less 34 4mA or less 34 4mA or less 24mA or less FPO E16YT P 25mA or 48mA or less FPO E32T P 40mA or 68 8mA or less 48mA or less FPO Intelligent unit 21 20mA or 100mA or less 80 20mA or 60mA or less 04 20mA or 100mA or less 4 20mA or 130mA or less FPO TC4 FPO TC8 25mA or FPO IOL 30mA or 40mA or less FPO CCLS 40mA or 40mA or less Pr
86. terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise Wire 5 l CORRECT INCORRECT Wire Chapter 8 Precautions During Programming 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 1 1 Duplicated Output 2422 vecteurs 8 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Handling BCD Data cece eee eee 8 2 1 BCD Da 8 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC Handling Index 5 5 eee eee 8 3 1 IndexRegisters cece eee 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers cece eee eee 8 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Operation Errors ord baked a weeds 8 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation EXTOPO CCUFPS tea cesta iat a atia E eic Ros d 8 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors 8 4 4 Points to Check in Program Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Melrose ette metae 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time 8 14 10 11 12 13 13 w next page Precautions During Programming 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9
87. the directional output turns on and the elapsed value of the high speed counter decreases By setting H13 in the control code the directional output is the reverse of that above For detailed information F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 Home return Until the home input X0 or X1 is entered by executing instruction F168 the pulse is continuously output To decelerate the movement when near the home set the bit corresponding to DT9052 DT90052 to off on off with the near home input For detailed information FO MV F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 J OG operation Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for instruction F169 is in the on state The directional output and output frequency are specified by instruction F169 For detailed information F169 PLS and section 9 4 5 High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 3 I O Allocation and Wiring Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a directional output The pulse output terminal directional output terminal and home input I O allocation is determined by the channel used For detailed information we section 9 2 1 Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact point and turning on and off the specified bit of DT9052 DT90052 For detailed information FO MV Up t
88. unit from intelli gent unit Data write Writes the data into the intelligent unit into intelli gent unit Data read Reads the data from the intelligent unit at the MEWNET F from remote I O slave station MEWNET F slave station Data write Writes the data into the intelligent unitat the MEWNET F into remote I O slave station ME WNET F slave station Machine The machine language program is called language program call SMPL Starts sampling data 1 PSMPL Sampling STRG When the trigger of this instruction turns on the sampling 1 trigger PSTRG RTT trace stops 9 Time addition CADD The time after 521 S 2 elapses from the time of 5142 5151 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D The time that results from subtracting 521 S 2 from substruction PCSUB the time 5112 9511 51 is stored in D 2 D 1 D Serial data This is used to send data to or receive data from an exter communica nal device through the specified COM RS232C or tion RS 485 port BIN arithmetic instruction F160 Double word DSQR S D p160 32 bit data ppsog square root 12 108 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 C14 C24 C16 C40 FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH gt i i F160 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P160 Notes BIN arithmetic instruction e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FP
89. value area EV do not change Operation of Rewrite During RUN Completed Flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program Supported in CPU Ver 2 0 and subsequent versions Precautions During Programming FPO 8 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible Instructions which do not allow rewriting during RUN Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE Subroutine instructions SUB RET Interrupt instructions INT IRET Control instructions ED LBL LBL instructions allow insertion and writing but not deletion and clearing Instructions which do not allow rewriting to subprograms The following instructions do not allow rewriting during subroutines or interrupt programs J ump label instructions J P LBL Loop label instructions LOOP LBL Master control relay master control relay end instructions MC MCE Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN When a syntax error has occurred During forced input output operation Interrupt Restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If a rewrite during RUN is executed the following problems may occur Exercise caution Interrupt programs will b
90. 0 60 Va 70 70 o M A Kc S 9 Ds ca m sec Sle Ay colh meali Hee 0 2i Xi Ds eS eS o ci o 4 n m uw oo N N unit mm in A B C D dimensions Unit mm in Control unit type A A B A4B4C A4B4C 42D Control unit 1 expansion 2 expansion 3 expansion only unit units units connected connected connected C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM 25 0 984 50 1 969 75 2 953 100 3 937 6161 C16CT C16P C16CP C32T C32CT C32P C32CP 30 1 181 55 2 165 80 3 150 105 4 134 FPO Dimensions A 4 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 4 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate One plate 4 0 157 25 0 0 984 10 0 0 394 gt l 6 0 0 236 m x 3 90 0 3 543 60 0 2 362 dir 10 0 0 39 dir 5 0 0 197 re 2 5 0 098 unit mm in unit mm in 3 5 0 138 Four plates in series Mounting hole dimensions 100 3 937 o S 25 01 25 025 0 984 0 984 0 984 xk OQ 90 0 3 543 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 MET o oooO dir 5 0 2 362 After joining all of the FPO slim type
91. 0 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY 2 Y20 to Y2F WY 4 Y 40 to Y4F WY6 Y60 to Y6F A80 Input CHO 2 4 6 16 WX2 WXA4 WX6 TC4 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Tes Input CH1 3 5 7 16 Wx3 WX5 WX7 points X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F AO04V A04I Input 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WXA X40 to 4 WX6 X60 to X6F Output CHO 2 4 6 16 WY2 4 WY6 points Y20 to Y2F Y 40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Output CH1 3 5 7 16 WY3 WY5 WY7 points Y30 to Y3F Y50 to Y5F Y70 to Y7F Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output 32 points Y20 to Y3F 40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F The channel data of FP0 A80 TC4 TC8 A04V and A04l will switch and be read or written by a user program that contains the conversion data switch flag Please verify with the manual for the FPO CC Link Slave unit 1 0 Allocation FPO 5 3 Expansion I O Unit Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Installation Adding Expansi n Units 22 seesaw eee yk ie 6 3 Important Notes euet beet 6 5 Attachment to DIN 5 6 8 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 9 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 10 Installation FPO FPO Installation 6 1 Adding Expansion Units 6 1 Adding Expansion Units Expansion method 1 Peel the seal on the
92. 010 00000000 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00011101 00000000 00011110 00000000 00011111 00000000 00111111 00000000 11111111 00100111 00001111 12 141 Specifications FPO 12 11 ASCII Codes 12 11 ASCII Codes b7 gt be 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 gt bs 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Most significant digit ASCII HEX code 2 3 4 5 oleo lolo o NUL DEL ole P l p 0 0 0 1 1 soH DC 1 A Q a q 0 0 1 0 2 STX DC 2 B R b r 0 0 1 1 3 ETX DC 3 C S C S 0 1 0 0 4 EOT DC4 4 D T d t 0 1 0 1 5 ENO NAK 5 E U e u ol l lo 5EMEBCKSYN amp 6 F V f v 0 1 1 1 8 7 BEL ETB 7 G WwW g w 5 1 0 0 0 8 BS CAN 8 H X h x 1 0 0 1 2 9 HT EM 9 Y y 1 0 1 0 A LF SUB Z j 1 0 1 1 B VT ESC f K k 1 1 0 0 c rr lt L 1 1 0 1 D CR GS M m 1 1 1 0 E so RS gt N 1 1 1 1 F SI US o DEL 12 142 Appendix A 1 A 2 A 3 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 Dimensions Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit A 3 A l 1 FP0 C10RS CIOCRS C14RS C14CRS E8RS E TOR ST Di petat 3 A 1 2 FPO0 C10RM C10CRM C14RM C14CRM E8RM E16RM eaves 3 A 1 3 FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP E 16T E 16P E8X E8Y T E8Y P E32T E32P E16X E1
93. 1 7 segment decode PSEGT ENCO Ta 16 bit data combine Description Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D Decodes part of the data of S and stores itin D The part is specified by n Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display and stores it in D 1 D Encodes part of the data of S and stores itin D The part is specified by n The least significant digit of each of the n words of data beginning at S are stored united in order in D 16 bit data distribute Character ASC ASCII code PASC 16 bit table data search Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in distrib uted to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D Twelve characters of the character constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 45 The data of S1 is searched for in the areas in the range 92 to S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 and DT90037 and DT90038 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP 10SH 32 bit table data search Data shift instructions Data table shift out and PCMPR compress The data of 511 S1 is searched for in the 32 bit data designated by S3 beginning from S2 and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and s
94. 102 OMV K 200 DT 103 DT103 Acceleration decelera tion time 200 ms Drs F168 SPD1 DT 100 HO DT105 10000 pls prios EU Positioning completion pulse 1 s R12 TMX 0 K10 5000Hz i F1 DMV K10000 DT 104 Fo my KO DT 106 side 7 side 10000 pulses Motor 500Hz 0 Hz 200 ms 200 ms FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Relative value positioning operation minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y 2 turns on X2 R903A R22 R20 Hor F Positioning operations running R20 R20 R21 oF Positioning operations start DT100 Control code H102 H H102 DT 100 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 Initial speed 1000 Hz DT102 Maximum speed FOMV K1000 DT 101 FOMV K 300 DT 103 6000 Hz FO MV K6000 DT 102 DT103 Acceleration decelera tion time 300 ms bris F168SPD1 DT100 HO DT105 8000 pls prios R903A R20 T1 R22 DT106 p Hor 4 F Positioning completion pulse 1 s uS TMX 1 K10 6000 Hz DMV K 8000 DT 104 Fowv Ko pr106 side side Motor 8000 pulses 1000 Hz 0 Hz i o Cc gt 300 ms 300 ms High speed Counter P ulse Output
95. 2 D 51 OR S2 D S1 AND S2 OR ST AND S2 D F68 16 bit data exclusive NOR 16 bit data unite XNR PXNR 51 AND S2 OR S1 AND 2 D S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 D When S3 is HO 52 D When S3 is HFFFF 51 D 12 90 Specifications Availability Data compare instructions FP1 1 12 8 Table of Instructions FP M 1 C14 C16 C24 C40 Logic operation instru A ctions Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPX FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 91 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Data conversion instructions Block check code calculation Hexadecimal data ASCII code Description Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S 1 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by 51 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD H 42 41 44 43 BADC ASCII code Hexadeci mal data 4 digit BCD ASCII code 4 digit BCD data Converts the ASCII code specified by 51 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DC BA Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 51 an
96. 2 1 3 2 2 Input Specifications insulation method Input impedance approx 5 6 ka Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4V DC Input points 8 5 4 points common per common E8RM Note E16RS 8 points common E16RM E16T E16P E8X E32T E32P 16 points common E16X ON voltage ON current 19 2 V orless 3 mA orless OFF voltage OFF current 2 4 V or more 1 mA or more Response time OFF lt gt ON 2 ms or less t24VD M C 66 s ON OFF the same as above Operating mode indicator g Note Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Expansion I O Units 3 2 Specifications 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by the temperature FPO E16RS E16RM at24 V DC Number of 8 at 26 4 V DC input points per common which are simultaneous ON 47 55 116 6 131 Ambient temperature C F FPO E 16T E 16P E 8X at 26 4 V DC Number of g input points per common i whichare simultaneous 4 f ON at 24 V DC 34 43 55 93 2 109 4 131 Ambient temperature C F FPO E 32T E 32P E 16X at 26 4 V DC Number of 1 3t24 V DC input points per common whichare simultaneous 8 ON 26 34 559 788 932 131 Ambient temperature
97. 2 Important Notes e Installation space Leaveatleast 50 mm 1 97 in of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more r Lj aD FPO Ll uu uuu 50 mm 1 97 in or more Maintain a minimum of 100 mm 3 937 in between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the FPO unit 100mm 3 937 in or more Other device or panel door FPO Keep the first 100 mm 3 937 in from the front surface of the FPO control unit open in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring Installation FPO 6 3 Attachment to DIN Rails 6 3 Attachment to DIN Rails The FPO unit enables one touch attachment to DIN rails Procedure Fit the upper hook of the FPO unit onto the DIN rail Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the FPO unit into position Mounting panel a i DIN rail You can easily remove the FPO unit as described below Procedure 1 Inserta slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever Pull the attachment lever downwards Lift up the FPO unit and remove it from the rail FPO unit DIN rail 3 v A DIN rail attach
98. 2C SL1 K6144 K0 to K6144 T32C K16384 KO to K16384 12 25 Specifications FPO 12 5 Table of Special Internal R elays 12 5 Table of Special Internal Relays The special internal relays turn on and off underspecial conditions The on and off states are notoutputexternally Writing is notpossible with a programming tooloran instruction R9000 Self diagnostic Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs error flag The self diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000 R9001 to R9003 Not used I O verification error Turns on when an I O verification error occurs The position number of the I O where the verification error was occured is stored in DT9010 Not used Operation error flag Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The ad hold dress where the error occurred is stored in DT9017 indicates the first oper ation error which occurred Operation error flag Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs non hold The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT9018 The contents change each time a new error occurs Carry flag Turns on for an instant when an overflow or underflow occurs when 1 is set by one of the shift instructions flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the F60 CMP to F63 DWIN comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared resu
99. 341 S3 347 Pointtype prLiMT S141 51 D D inr erae When 5241 S2 S341 53 limit control 52 1 52 gt D 1 D When S141 S1 or S3 1 53 or S2 1 S2 341 3 01 D Floating FBAND When S141 S1 341 S3 point type PFBAND 341 3 5111 51 D 1 D data dead When 5241 2 lt S341 53 band control 53 1 53 5241 52 gt D 1 D When S14 S1 or 8341 53 or S241 S2 0 0 D D Floating FZONE When 5311 53 0 0 point type PFZONE 341 53 5141 1 D 1 D data zone When 5341 3 20 0 0 0 D41 D control When S341 S3 20 0 341 53 521 52 D 1 D Floating Searches the maximum value in the real number data point type table between the area selected with S 1 and S2 and data maxi stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S 1 is mum value stored in D 2 12 134 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability C16 C20 C32 N A N A N A gt FP2SH Ie Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The instruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C 14 C 16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 135 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand FMIN PFMIN Floating point type data mini
100. 6YT E16YP A 4 1 4 FP0 C32T C32CT C 32P C 32CP T32CT B ser odo Dee opa d aet Sa tue A 4 A 1 5 FPOS LINK Control Unit A 5 FPO Power Supply Unit ier me A 5 Mounting on DIN RR e A 6 5 3 7 8 8 Detailed Specifications 6 A 9 Connection between RS232C portand PC A 10 Dimensions FPO FPO Dimensions A 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit A 1 Control Unit and Expansion Unit A 1 1 FPO CIORS CIOCRS C1A4RS C14CRS E8RS E16RS Illustrat
101. 999 X5X4X3X2X1X0 H1 H8 v Input H18 With the FPO settings X6 and X7 are invalid Using programming tool software X5X4 X3 X2 X1 Specify the input con tacts used as inter rupt inputs in the upper byte 0 Standard input 1 Interrupt input X5X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 Specify the effective interrupt edge in the lower byte When 0 on When 1 off Using FP programmer II When setting inputs X0 X1 X2 and X3 as interrupts and X0 and X1 are setas interrupt inputs when going from on to off S pecify Specify edge interrupt 15 X5X4X3X2X1X0 X5X4X3X2X1X0 hd Y T T HO H3 HO HF v Input H30F Input Pulse catch input function setting settings 403 Interrupt input settings 404 to 407 Unused With the FPO values set with the program ming tool become invalid 12 22 Specifications Notes 12 4 Table of System Registers e With the TOOL software 0 or 1 is set for each biton the screen in the setting for system register 403 e If system register 400 to 403 are set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input When the high speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and input functions as counter input for the high speed counter No 400 H1 a This settin
102. CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM X0 7 S Em x7 m ia om COM Sa PROG E YO Mum a 3m E E 147 Load e pa Load 9 5 8 Power supply COM Load lt Power supply 2 5 Load Power supply Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Control Units 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 3 C16T C16CT C16T C16CT X1 COM Output Y1 e The two COM terminals of input terminal X0 7 are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Control Units FPO 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 4 C16P C16CP C16P C16CP
103. Control Units FPO 2 4 Pin EdyODls PECES 2 22 2 4 1 CIORS CIOCRS CIORM CIOCRM 2 22 2 4 0 CI4RS C14CRS CIA4RM CIACRM 2 22 24 3 CIOTDGIOGT iced e EE CP eus 2 23 2 24 24 5 G32TICS2C T T32CT as ak Prata 2 25 2 4 6 C32P C32CP T320P 2 26 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type 0005 2 27 FPO Control Units 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 Parts and Terminology There are sixteen different control unittypes available 1 PP PPP NOUR WN 8 18 TOTOO cu Y SU C10RS terminal type C14RS terminal type C10CRS with RS232C port terminal type C14CRS with RS232C port terminal type C10RM connector type C14RM connector type C10CRM with RS232C port connector type C14CRM with RS232C port connector type C16T C16P C16CT with RS232C port C16CP with RS232C port C32T C32P C32CT with RS232C port C32CP with RS232C port T32CT with RS232C port T32CP with RS232C port In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each control unit Control Units FPO 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 1 Control Unit Types
104. DC 4 5 A maximum per common at Resistance load Output points per C10RM 2 points common 1 point common 1 point common common C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM 4 points common 1 point common 1 point common C14CRM C14RS C14CRS Response time OFF ON approx 10 ms OFF approx 8 ms Mechanical life time 20 000 000 operations or more Electrical life time 100 000 operations or more Surge absorber Operating mode indicator FPO Control Units 2 2 Specifications 2 2 4 2 Transistor Output Type FPO transistor output types C16T C16CT C16P C16CP C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP em Besrpion Insulation method optical coupler Output type open collector Rated load voltage NPN open collector type 5 to 24 V DC Note PNP open collector type 24 V DC Operating load voltage range NPN open collector type 4 75 to 26 4 V DC PNP open collector type 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 0 1A Max surge current 0 3A Output points per C16T C16CT 8 points common common C16P C16CP C32T C32CT 16 points common C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less ON state voltage drop 1 5 V orless External power 21 6 to 26 4 V DC supply for driving internal circuit Current YO and Y 1 5 mA 1 point except YO and Y 1 3 mA 1 point Response time OFF ON 1msorless YO and Y 1 only 50 us or less ON OF
105. Description Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D 32 bit gray code binary data conversion DGBIN PDGBIN Converts the gray code of S 1 S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D Bitline to bit column conversion Bit column to bit line conversion COLM PCOLM LINE PLINE Character strings instructions F257 Comparing P257 character F258 Character P258 string cou pling Number of characters in a character string Search for character string The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are stored in bit n of D to D 15 The values of bit n of S to 5115 are stored in bits 0 to 15 of D These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special inter nal relay These instructions couple one character string with ano ther These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string The specified character is searched in a character string Retrieving data from character strings right side These instructions retrieve a specified number of charac ters from the right side of the character string Retrieving data from character strings left side These instructions retrieve a specified number of charac ters from the left side of the character string Retrieving a character string from a character string
106. ERN RS232C portis not used SD Send Data Character bit 8 bits Parity check odd Stop bit 1 bit Header without STX code Terminator CR 414 Baud rate 9600 bps Suitable wires twisted wire Size AWG 28 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area 0 08 to 1 25 mm Use a shielded wire of the above wiring We recommend grounding the shield section Also if using a pole terminal see section 7 6 FPO Wiring 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port When tightening the RS 232C port use a Screwdriver P hoenix ContactCo Productno 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less Procedure Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 7 mm 0 276 in S uitable wire Insert wire into the RS232C port until it contacts the back of the RS232C port RS232C port S uitable wire Tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Clockwise Wiring FPO 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port Notes When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the RS232C port terminal construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the
107. F 1 ms or less YO and Y 1 only 50 us or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED For NPN open collector type able to be used with different voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for driving the internal circuit External power supply for Jer driving internal circuit M 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated load voltage nie Yn S 5 V to 24 V DC Internal e Load circuit j w Ground for load voltage and ieee Tye for external power supply for driving internal circuit Control Units FPO 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 1 Relay Output Type C10RS C10CRS C10RM C 10C RM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM FP0 C10RS C 10CRS C10R M C 10C RM C 14RS C 14C RS C 14RM C 14C RM aaa Input side 5 6 kQ a A Note 1 circuit 5 6 kQ Xn e O e Internal Note circuit 7 p pep T com e e E 24 V DC Note 2 Output side YO Load internal 3 N circuit lle Yn Q Load e t circuit 3 Been Power e supply 1 The resistor in the control unitis 2 for XO through X5 and 1 for X6 and X7 2 Either positive or negati
108. F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the pow er down of a slave station FP2 FP2H and FP10SH Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data reg isters DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register 27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set A Available 12 47 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes MEWNET F attribute Selectable error Continues MEWNET F terminal station error Continues MEWNET F update synchro nous error Continues Description and steps to take In the unit on the slave station an ab normality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2H and FP10SH Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition FP3 Check the contents of special data reg isters DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register 28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The voltage of the backup battery lowered or th
109. FP2SH FP10SH D 1 D 8 digit BCD data increment 4 digit BCD data decrement 01 D 1 D D D 1 D 8 digit BCD data decrement 081 D 1 D 1 D 12 88 FPO Specifications mara un 32 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Im Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 89 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Data compare instructions CMP PCMP DCMP PDCMP 16 bit data compare 32 bit data compare 16 bit data band compare 32 bit data band compare Description 1 52 R900A on S1 52 R900B on 1 lt S2 R900C on 141 1 S241 52 R900A on 141 S1 S241 52 R900B on 141 1 5241 2 R900C on 1 53 R900A on 2 orz S1 orz S3 R900B on 1 2 R900C on 141 1 S341 53 R900A on 521 S2 or4S141 S1 or2 S3 1 53 R900B on 141 1 5241 52 R900C on Block data compare Logic operation instructions F66 P66 F67 P67 16 bit data S1 52 D AND 16 bitdata WOR S1 S2 D OR PWOR 16 bit data XOR exclusive OR PXOR Compares the two blocks beginning with S 2 and S3 to see if they are equal S1 AND 5
110. FPO SELS LINK Address to niue 12 140 12 10 Binary Hexadecimal BCD Expressions 12 141 TAIL ASCIH 1 Seer e ped s 12 142 Specifications FPO 12 2 FPO Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications Relay outputtype Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP Programming method Control method Relay symbol Cyclic operation Controllable 1 0 Basic unit Total 10 Total 14 Total 16 Total 32 Total 32 Max 128 points Input 6 Input 8 Input 8 Input 16 Input 16 Input 64 Output 4 Output 6 Output 8 Output 16 Output 16 Output 64 at S LINK block With expansion Max 58 Max 62 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 Max 96 unit 1 at When confi expansion gured with block same output type as control unit With expansion Max 106 Max 110 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 unit 2 When relays and transistors are mixed Program memory Built in memory Builtin EEPROM without battery Built in EEPROM without BultinEEPROM without batey Program capacity 2 720 steps 20d D 000 5 000 steps steps steps Numbers of Basic instruction High level s Operation speed 0 9us step by basic instruction I O refresh and base time With no expansion board 0 3ms With expansion board s 0 3ms and 1 x number of expansion boards ms Operation Relay Intemal relay R
111. H non condensing Breakdown voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute between I O terminal and power supply ground terminal 1500 V AC for 1 minute between I O terminal and power supply ground ter minal relay outputtype only Insulation resistance min 100 MQ measured with a 500 V DC megger between I O terminal and ground terminal 3axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s or more 4 times on 3 axes Vibration resistance 10 Hz to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm 0 030 in 10 min on Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 us based on in house measure ments Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust 2 2 4 3 Weight m weight pe Wesm n fioo eooo C32 approx 115 g 4 06 oz IOL TC4 approx 85 g 3 00 oz T32 approx 125 g 4 41 oz TC8 approx 95 g 3 35 oz E8R E8YR approx 90 g 3 17 oz CCLS approx 80 g 2 82 oz Control Units FPO 2 2 2 2 1 2 Unit type FPO Control unit S LINK Control unit Expansion unit Specifications FPO C10 FPO C14 Control unit The current consumed by the control unit power supply connector If expansion units or intelligent units are added the current is increased by the value indicated below 100mA or less Expansion unit The current consumed by the expansion unit power supply connector If a unit is not listed below it means that it has no power
112. HC1S to F170 control flag forch3 PWM is executed I Note Used by the system 12 28 FPO Specifications 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers The special data registers are one word 16 bit memory areas which store specific information With the exception of registers for which Writing is possible is indicated in the Description column these registers cannot be written to FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT90000 DT9000 Self me error The self diagnostic error code is stored here when code a self diagnostic error occurs Monitor the error using decimal display DT90010 DT9010 verify error unit The position of the I O for which an error occurred is stored in bits 0 to 3 DT90014 DT9014 Auxiliary register for One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit operation positions 0 to 3 when F105 BSR or F106 BSL instruction is executed DT90015 DT9015 Auxiliary register for The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in operation DT9015 DT90015 when F32 or F52 B in struction is executed DT90016 DT9016 The divided remainder 32 bit is stored DT9015 and DT9016 DT90015 and DT90016 when F33 D or F53 DB instruction is executed DT90017 DT9017 Operation error After commencing operation the address where address hold the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display DT90018 DT9018 Operation e
113. M Output Function 9 33 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function cis scent pate tu ma e dde 9 33 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 1 Outline of Functions 9 1 Outline of Functions 9 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter Functions that use the built in high speed counter There are three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FPO High speed counter function The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Roller Cutter C 274 Lead wire tape Inverter START STOP signa Cutter blade control signal Encoder output is FPO 9 input to the high speed counter Pulse output function Combined with a commercially available motor driver the pulse output function enables positioning control With the appropriate instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and J OG operation Stepping motor Servo motor FPO Pulse output yo HHE Motor CW CCW output driver Y 2 A 1 Pulse output Y1 HH Motor CW CCW output driver 2 3 Stepping motor Servo motor High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 1 Outline of Func
114. NTED WITH SOY INK Please contact Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Company K Head Office 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan K Telephone 81 6 6908 1050 K Facsimile 81 6 6908 5781 http Awww nais e com All Rights Reserved 2004 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works Ltd ARCT1F389E 200403 3ZT ACG M389E Specifications are subject to change without notice Printed in Japan
115. O FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The instruction is available for FP CPU Ver 2 0 or later 3 On the FPO itis only possible to use F157 and F158 with the T32 type 12 109 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Special instructions High speed counter instructions High speed counter and Pulse output controls Operand Description Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by 5 The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed count er and Pulse output S DT9044 DT9044 D Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse out put elapsed value area DT9045 DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT9045 DT9044 to D 1 D High speed counter out High speed counter out put reset Speed control Pulse output and pattern output con trols See FP1C14 C16 FP M C16T Pulse output terminal Y7 MV S DMV HCOS S Yn The specified external output relay Yn turns on when the elapsed value of the high speed counter agrees with the specified target value S 1 5 The specified external output relay Y n turns off when the elapsed value of the high speed counter agrees with the specified target value S 1 5 Controls conditions of outputs according to th
116. O Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability C16 C20 C32 Index register b F410 N A N A N A N A P410 F411 P411 File register bank processing instructions F414 P414 F415 P415 F416 P416 55 Note A Available N A Not available 12 139 Specifications FPO 12 9 FPO SL1S LINK Address 12 9 FPO SL1S LINK Address Hexade cimal S LINK address S LINK address X100 32 20 X101 33 21 X102 34 22 S LINK address Hexade cimal X103 35 23 X104 36 24 X105 37 25 33 X113 51 55 37 nT m O S LINK address ad S LINK address dress input Deci Y mal S LINK address c cima 12 140 FPO Specifications 12 10 Binary Hexadecimal BCD Expressions 12 10 Binary Hexadecimal BCD Expressions pem eem mm em 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000011 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000101 00000000 00000110 00000000 00000111 uM OU FE 00000000 00001000 00000000 00001001 00000000 00001010 00000000 00001011 00000000 00001100 00000000 00001101 00000000 00001110 00000000 00001111 00000000 00010000 00000000 00010001 00000000 00010010 00000000 00010011 00000000 00010100 00000000 00010101 00000000 00010110 00000000 00010111 00000000 00011000 00000000 00011001 00000000 00011
117. O to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation me next page 12 10 FPO Specifications 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants l3 Notes 1 There are two unit types the hold type that saves the conditions that exist just before turning the power off or changing from the RUN mode to PROG mode and the non hold type that resets them These areas can be specified as hold type or non hold type by setting system register For the FPO T32 the selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register For details about the setting of system registers refer to section 12 4 For the FPO C10 C 14 C 16 C 32 SL 1 that area is fixed and allotted the numbers as shown below Hold type and non hold type areas item C10 C14C16 C32 SL1 Non hold type All points Non hold type Hold type Non hold type From the set value to C139 4 points elapsed values C140 to C143 976 points RO to R60F 61 words WRO to WR60 From the set value to C127 16 points elapsed values C128 to C143 880 points RO to R54F 55 words WRO to WR54 Hold type 32 points R610 to R62F 2 words WR61 to WR62 128 points R550 to R62F 8 words WR55 to WR62 Non hold type Hold type 1652 words DTO to DT1651 8 words DT1652 to DT1659 6112 words DTO to DT6111 32 words DT6112 to DT6143 2 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the
118. PUN WH Li ess OM duis PROG wor YB F e Output Output Y20 Y21 ool 28 Y29 LIRE A f e a Load Load BEEE Load Load Load 2e fifle e ffia o Load Load Load s Load Load Load i UE ul y gt 0 tase Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The two terminals of output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 6 E32P E32P X20 X21 X28 X29 w7 WF i N J H 2 5 a ha f V me nal 72 nz 0 AIH HH H E FO PROG ww Y F e Output Y20
119. R 5111 S1 OR S24 S2 D 1 D 5141 S1 AND S241 52 OR S141 SI AND 5211 S2 D 1 D 32 bit data XNR Double word 32 bit data unites Data conversion instructions 16 bit binary GRY data Gray code conversion S14 S1 AND S241 S2 OR ST31 5T AND S241 52 D D S141 S1 AND 5311 53 0 2 1 52 AND 341 3 DH D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D 32 bit binary DGRY data Gray code conversion Converts the 32 bit binary data of 51 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D 12 116 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability C56 C16 C20 C32 Screen display instruc i i i Basic function instruction Data transfer instructions Logic operation instructions F216 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P216 F217 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P217 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Data conversion instructions N A N A N A Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 12 117 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions 16 bit gray code binary data conversion Boolean Operand GBIN PGBIN
120. T button in this case Ifthe system SET button is pressed afteran errorhas occurred and before itis canceled the error will be canceled If the cause ofthe error has not been corrected at that point however be aware that the I O device for that address will be skipped during any subsequent checks I Note If the system SET button is pressed without recovery having been made that status will be recognized for that address and any locations where recovery has not been made will not be recognized S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O Device Addresses can be Set freely regardless of the position of the I O device connected to the system but problems in the wiring of the main cable such as broken or disconnected wires can be detected more easily if I O devices closer to the S LINK control unit are given smaller addresses and addresses increase in sequential order for I O devices which are farther away from the S LINK control unit S LINK Numeric values indicate the initial address for each I O control unit 10 20 30 40 device 80 70 60 50 Up to two I O devices can be assigned the same address within the system for any individual S LINK control unit Do not set the same address for three or m
121. T9024 DT9025 Note 2 Scan time maximum value Note 1 Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts INT 0 to 5 The maximum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms 2 stored data decimal x 0 1 K125 indicates 12 5ms The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL in struction can be monitored here Monitor using bi nary display 5 nu 7 3 L 23 19 16 NT No 0 interrupt disabled masked 1 interrupt enabled unmasked 0 Bit No DT90026 DT9026 Not used DT90027 Note 2 DT90028 DT9028 DT90029 DT9029 DT90030 Note 2 DT90031 Note 2 DT90032 Note 2 DT9027 Note 2 DT9030 Note 2 DT9031 Note 2 DT9032 Note 2 Periodical interrupt interval INT 24 Message 2 DT90033 Note 2 DT90034 Note 2 DT90035 Note 2 DT90036 DT9036 DT90037 DT9037 3 Notes DT9033 Note 2 DT9034 Note 2 DT9035 Note 2 Message 3 Work 1 for F96 SRC instruction The value set by ICTL instruction is stored KO periodical interrupt is not used K1 to K3000 10ms to 30s The contents of the specified message are stored in these special data registers when F149 MSG instruction is executed The number of data that match the searched data is stored here when F96 SRC instruction is ex ecuted 1 Scan time display is only possible in RUN
122. Wiring 7 4 2 LED Equipped Reed Switch When a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the ON voltage applied to the FPO input circuit is greater than 19 2 V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series LED equipped reed switch FPO 7 4 3 Two Wire Type Sensor If the input of the FPO does notturn OFF because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Input terminal Two wire type sensor FPO COM Internal circuit l Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor The OFF voltage of the FPO input is 2 4 V therefore select an R value so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V The impedance of the FPO input terminal is 5 6 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R or 144 56 2 4 The wattage W ofthe resistor is W Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W FPO Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring 7 4 4 LED Equipped Limit Switch If the input of the FPO does not turn OFF because of the leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Input LED equipped l terminal limit switch Bleeder if j resistor FRO COM Internal circuit T 1
123. X1 YO anEe m m X0 X2 Y1 Amr gt rH Hor X0 X3 e POPS When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction FPO Precautions During Programming 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How Operation of Rewrite During RUN The FPO allows program rewriting even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several msec to several hundreds of msec Operation During Rewrite External output Y is held External output X is ignored The timer T stops the clock Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right shift registers F119 LRSR are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped Internal clock relays Special internal relays are also stopped Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set Values for Timer Counter Instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are presetin the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed
124. ad once again Abnormal I O unit FP Check the contents of special data reg ister DT90002 and abnormal ex pansion unit Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register 21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data reg isters FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT90002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register 21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function 12 7 Error Codes A Available 12 45 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes Intelligent unit error unit verify error Selectable Selectable Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FP Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90006 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit FP2 FP2H and FP10SH Check the contents of special data reg isters DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check
125. allel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 1 gt S241 S2 or S141 1 S2 41 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 1 lt S241 S2 or S141 1 S2 41 52 12 78 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability 32 bit data compare OR ORD 32 bit data compare OR ORD lt gt 32 bit data compare OR ORD gt 32 bit data compare OR ORD gt 32 bit data compare OR ORD lt 32 bit data compare OR e A Available N A Not available 12 79 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions 12 8 2 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefi
126. alue press the lt CLR clear gt key and write the new value as indicated in the system register table 12 13 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers Precautions when setting system registers System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input tool port RS232C port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system resister values parameters will be initialized 12 4 20 Content of System Register Settings Setting the timers and counters System register 5 By indicating the counter startnumber the timer and counter are splitinto two areas The timer and counter together total 144 points and the default value for the splitis 100 Thus the point allotment is as shown in the table below 100 points No 0 to No 99 44 points No 100 to No 143 Setting example To increase the number of timers to 120 change the value of system register 5 to K 120 MIN 0 All counter Set value lt n Counter size increases Set value gt n Set value n Timer size increases Counter MAX 144 All timer For FPO T32 setthe system registers 5 and 6 to the same value T
127. an also write the data to EEPROM by using the F12 EEPROM read instruction and the F13 EEPROM write instruction Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 Expansion I O Units Parts and Terminology 3 3 31 1 Expansion I O Unit Types 3 4 Specifications sessi s ERR Exe d D ERIS A 3 6 3 21 General Specifications 3 6 3 2 2 Input Specifications eed 3 6 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points 3 7 3 2 3 Output Specifications x Jeressc ete veces da 3 8 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type 3 8 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type 3 9 Internal Circuit Diagram s c eec tem e 3 10 3 3 1 Relay Output Type EBRS E8RM E 16R S E16RM 3 10 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type 2 oie eta eoe 3 11 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type E16T E32T oaa 3 11 3 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type EL6P E32P rocis terenie 3 13 3 3 3 Expansion Input Units EBX E16X 3 14 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 3 215 3 3 41 NPN Open Collector Type ESTTIE denis 3 15 3 3 4 2 PNP Open Collector Type IEBYPIEIOYP oia iva 3 17 me next page Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts E TAI 3 18 Sul EGR SVEOR dt xeu ed 3 18 3 4 2 EIORS EIORM ju severe yeaa ees 3 19 Sud ELOT gerenjex e Cx toy wer peius 3 20 Jd VETOR 3 21 dub tuned ic 3 22 34b SESAB BG eo erar e
128. and DMV S Transfers 51 S to high speed counter and Pulse out read of the DT90044 put elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 elapsed value of high speed DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output countegand D elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Pulse output F166 Target value HC1S Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in much on high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S with chan nel specifi cation F167 Targetvalue HC1R Turns output Y n off when the elapsed value of the built in much off high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S with chan nel specifi cation F171 Pulse output SPDH Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel with chan in accordance with the contents of the data table that nel specifi starts with S cation Trapezoidal control and home re turn F172 Pulse output PLSH Pulse strings are output from the specified output in ac with chan cordance with the contents of the data table that starts nel specifi with S cation J OG opera tion F173 PWM output PWMH PWM output is output from the specified output in accor with chan dance with the contents of the data table that starts with nel specifi S cation F174 Pulse output SPOH Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according with chan to the data table specified by S nel specifi cation Selectable data table co
129. and other load voltages can be Internal 5 Lr Pe circuit Load for 24 V connected FPO E 16T E 32T 5 6 kQ X20 9 O Internal nterna coc ms E circuit EE E TH zik e 5 6 Pas l X21 Duce Internal i circuit T DT lke dy 5 6 i i j X2n Ss 4 e E Internal J AL 1ke Jt 24V DC circuit fut t Note 1 COM uA T as Internal b r4 d 120 Load fors v circuit E zl DUM MES e e 9 r Internal Ibi e e 21 Load for5 V e circuit T J oi ZN OA Ae e e e 9 24V DC 5vDC 1 External Rated load ww power supply 5 voltage for driving Vip F e internal circuit e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type E16P E32P FPO E 16P E 32P 5 6 ko e aai l Interna
130. ata stored in 551 S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by 51 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D The data in degrees of an angle specified in 5 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D 12 132 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH gt 56 Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FP and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The instruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C 14 C 16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 133 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions H Operand Description F338 Floating The angle data in radians real number data specified in P338 point type S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the data radian resultis stored in D 1 D degree Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating FCMP S141 S1 2 5241 52 R900A on ps S141 51 S241 52 R900B on compare S141 51 S241 2 R900C on F346 Floating 141 1 5341 53 R900A on PE sd S241 52 or 2 S141 1 or 5341 53 R900B compare on S1 1 S1 lt S241 S2 R900C on F347 Floating FLIMT When 5111 1 gt 5
131. been sufficiently charged When first used no value has been determined therefore please write values using a programming tool or similar Precautions During Programming FPO 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 PWM Output Outline of Functions aasa 9 3 9 11 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed oir E RE MUS 9 3 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed COUNTE PEL 9 4 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 5 9 2 1 Specifications eos res meret 9 5 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions 9 7 High speed Counter Function 005 9 9 9 3 1 Outline of High speed Counter Function 9 9 9 3 2 Types oflnput Modes 9 9 9 3 9 TIO Allocation ine e c Xx ex 9 11 9 3 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter FUNGUO M ud d aat os be tL ott 9 12 03 5 Sample Program iiis 9 14 Pulse Output Function usn en tale Dice Meer ted 9 18 9 4 1 Outline of Pulse Output Function 9 18 9 4 2 Control Mode adsessor a 9 19 9 4 3 I O Allocation and Wiring 9 20 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output FUNCIO Manere keok e D 9 22 9 4 5 Sample Program for Positioning Control 9 25 w next page High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 95 PWM Output Function ipi RE RAYS 9 33 9 5 1 Outline of PW
132. bit Ibit FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 2 Specifications 4 2 S pec ifications 4 2 1 General Specifications Rated operating voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6V to 26 4V DC Rated current consumption 150mA or less Allowed momentary power off time Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Storage temperature 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Storage humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Breakdown voltage 500V AC for 1 minute between S LINK terminal block and power supply ground terminals Insulation resistance min 100MQ measured with a 500V DC megger between S LINK terminal block and power supply ground terminals Vibration resistance 10Hz to 55Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75mm 0 030in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98m s2 or more 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50ns and lus based on in house measure ments Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 2 Specifications 4 2 2 S LINK Controller Specifications Rated power supply voltage 24 DC 10 Allowable ripple p p 4 1096 max Supplied from IN 24V IN OV ofthe S LINK terminal block Current consumption S LINK controller current consumption including D G line current consumption note 1 24V DC 1 6A max Maximum cur
133. card or ROM Specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area starting at D The data specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the IC card expansion memory area or ROM starting at D The program specified using S is transferred into the CPU from IC memory card and executes it D1 D2 D2 D1 32 bit data exchange 0141 D1 D2 1 D2 0241 D2 D1 1 D1 Higher lower byte in 16 bit data exchange 16 bit data block exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary SJP jump Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data t addition 32 bit data D addition PD 16 bit data addition The higher byte and lower byte of D are exchanged Exchange the data between D1 and D2 with the data specified by D3 The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and continues from there D 1 D S 1 5 DH D 51 2 D 32 bit data addition 5111 51 5241 52 DH D 12 82 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Number Availability FP1 1 FP M 1 C16 C20 C32 Control instruction N A N A N A Binary arithmetic instructions I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FPI FP M the P type high level instructions except for P13 PICWT instruction are not availabl
134. cations 12 1 Performance Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM Special Pulse Output functions output point function number Sane Output Not avai 40Hz to 10kHz Y 0 Y 1 one point 2 frequency output 40Hz to 5kHz Y0 Y 1 two point output PWM out Output Not avai Two points YO and Y 1 putfunc point tion number Note 6 Output Not avai Frequency 0 15Hz to Fre frequency 38Hz quency Note 9 0 15Hz to Duty 0 1 to 99 9 IKHz Duty 0 1 to 99 9 Two independent points Y0 and Y1 no interpolation function Memory Program and system EEPROM backup register Note 6 Note 12 Operation memory Areas which are held if the power Areas The oper Areas supply fails are fixed and are which are ation mem which are retained by the EEPROM held if the ory is held if the Number of points words of the power sup backed up power sup fixed hold areas in the various T memories are able sec are Counters 4 points retained by ondary retained by Internal relays 32 points the battery so the Date registers 8 words EEPROM thehold EEROM Note 13 Number type mem Number of points ory areas of points words of canbe words of the fixed specified the fixed hold areas using the hold areas in the program in the
135. cations will differ depending on the conditions of use il Example When using one pulse output contact with a maximum output frequency of 5 kHz the maximum counting speed of the high speed counter being used simultaneously is 5 kHz with the incremental mode and 1 kHz with the 2 phase mode FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 1 Outline of High speed Counter Function High speed counter function The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output The high speed counter function is able to count high speed pulses of frequencies up to 10 kHz To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match on instruction F166 To turn off an output use the target value match off instruction F167 Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function itis necessary to set system registers 400 and 401 For detailed information we section 12 4 9 3 2 Types of Input Modes Incremental input mode i on ops Li Li B Li off count 17217314 m3 n2 n 1 n Decremental input mode on X0 PIN Li Lf off
136. ch wide screwdriver Preferably use the specific terminal block screwdriver part number AFP0806 Phoenix type code SZSO 4 2 5 mm 098 inch or equivalent 3 The connector type relay output units have 2 connectors made by Nihon Molex Molex type code 51067 0900 9 pins Use the specific Molex connector press fit tool part number AFP0805 Nihon Molex type code 57189 5000 or equivalent 4 The transistor output units have a press fit socket for wire pressed terminal cable and contacts Use the press fit tool part number AXY52000 for wire pressed terminal cable FPO Overview 11 Components 11 3 Intelligent Units Product A Specifications PartNo Product No FPO Ther K J T R thermocouple Resolution 0 1 C FPO TC4 AFP 0420 Unt FPO TC8 AFP0421 Unit FP WEB AFP0610 FP Web FP0 A21 AFP0480 Server unit FP0 A80 AFP0401 FP0 A04V AFP04121 FP0 A04I AFP04123 K J T R thermocouple Resolution 0 1 C Unit for connecting FP series RS232C interface and Ethernet Web Server function and E mail sending function Number or channe Input range Input specifications hannels 0 5 V 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 FPO Analog 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 1 0 unit Output specifications ber or channe ut range ution 1 4000 ion 1 4000 FPO A D Converter Unit Converter Unit Number or channe Input range Input specifications V Resolution 1 4000 ion 1 4000
137. ching DC inductive loads with FPO relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Output terminal FPO COM FPO Surge absorber Example of surge absorber R 50 Q C 0 47 uF X AC inductive load Varistor AC inductive load w nextpage FPO Wiring When using a DC inductive load Diode Output terminal FPO COM DC inductive load Diode Reverse voltage Vg 3 times the load voltage 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads Average rectified forward current Io Load current or more 7 5 Output Wiring When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Output V Load terminal FPO Ed COM Output Inductor e MOO terminal Load FPO COM Wiring FPO 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type A screw down connection type terminal block socketfor terminal of F P 0 control unit and analog I O unitis used The terminal block socket and suitable wires are given below Terminal block socket Terminal block socket tem Descipion Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Suitable wires twisted wire Item Descr
138. city can cause problems Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity Do notuse thinner based cleaners because they deform the unit case and fade the colors Power supplies An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the FPO control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse FPO Before You Start Power supply sequence e Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the FPO control unit turns OFF before the power supply for I O e If the power supply for I O is turned OFF before the power supply of FPO control unit the FPO control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Before turning ON the power When turning ON the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When carrying out construction check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Setthe mode switch to PROG mode
139. ck If the output indicator LED remains OFF there is probably an abnormality in the FPO s output circuit Please contact your dealer 11 8 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition input indicator LEDs are OFF lt Procedure 1 gt Check the wiring of the input devices lt Procedure 2 gt Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnor mality in the FP0 s input circuit Please contact your dealer If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition input indicator LEDs are ON lt Procedure gt Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is OFF there is probably an abnormality in the F PO s input circuit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is ON check the program again Also check the leakage current atthe input devices e g two wire type sensor and check for the duplicated use of outputor the program flow when a control in struction such as MC or J P is used Check the settings of the I O allocation 11 9 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed When a password is set for the
140. correct area The program is too large to compile in the program memory Compile Change to PROG mode and reduce the memory total number of steps for the program full error FP2SH and FP10SH If memory expansion is possible com pilation will become possible when the memory is expanded A Available Ie Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 12 41 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes High level instruc tion type error High level instruc tion oper and error Description and steps to take In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are pro grammed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are pro grammed using the same trigger continu ously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruc tion which requires a specific combination operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of oper ands No progra error Continues Program may be damaged Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion
141. d S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 214 3 Converts the ASCII code specified by 51 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 H3412 4321 16 bit binary data ASCII code ASCII code 16 bit binary data Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes Converts the ASCII code specified by 51 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 001 32 bit binary data ASCII code F70 P70 F71 P71 F72 P72 F73 data ASCII code F74 P74 F75 P75 F76 P76 F77 P77 Converts the 32 bits of binary data 51 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D 1 D 12 92 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 FP Data conversion instructions F70 A A A P70 e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 93 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions H Boolean Operand ASCII code DABI 32 bit binary data PDAS 16 bit binary BCD data 4 digitBcp PBC data 4 digitBCD BIN data 16 bit binary data 32 bit binary DBCD data 8 digitBcD PDBCD data 8 digit BCD data 32 bit binary data
142. d code is added automatically to the data being sent When receiving data if Yes has been specified forthe start code parameter data following the start code is stored in the reception buffer Also atthe point at which the terminal code is received the reception completed flag R9038 goes on The start and terminal codes themselves are not stored in the reception buffer however For details see section 10 3 2 Ime Note If no terminal codes are specified for either transmission or reception the reception completed flag will not go on In this case watch the number of bytes received to determine whether the reception has been completed il Example Changing the terminal code to CR and LF Datalength Parit y che ck St opbit Terminal code Start code s 5 ChangeH3 default value t oH13 10 6 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 2 System Register Settings Setting the Baud Rate System Register 414 The baud rate transmission speed for general use serial communication is set to 9600 bps H1 in the default settings To change this setting to match the external device connected to the RS232C port select one of the values listed below Tool port RS232C port x HO 19200 bps HO 9600 bps H1 19200 bps H1 9600 bps H2 4800 bps If anything other than HO or H3 2400 bps H1is setforthe baud rate of H4 1200 bps tool port the baud rate will H5 600 bps be 9600 bps H6 300 b
143. d perire DE NERIS cece 3 26 SOLD ELON A Ms ete te EE Ee eats AY 3 27 3 4 1127 EE 3 28 Table of Contents FPO Chapter4 S LINK Control Unit 4 1 Names and Functions 4224 e TOt eot tena v deae i 4 3 4 2 Spec i MELLE 4 5 4 2 1 General Specifications ccc cece eee 4 5 4 2 2 5S LINK Controller Specifications 4 6 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply uam rod 4 7 4 3 1 4 7 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block sees 4 7 44 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies 00e 4 9 4 5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On 4 10 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 11 4 6 1 Recognizing tne Address a x ber cio 4 11 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O Device 4 12 4 7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators cece eee eee eens 4 13 4 8 Judging Errors Address Displays cece eee eee eee 4 14 Chapter5 O Allocation trt ET AE aceite E 5 3 5 2 CONTOU ME cn emer repete ent Pee mtt I Pas bade 5 4 5 3 Expansiot DOT ce etur o tot ox uode ta see oue 5 5 Chapter6 Installation
144. dder pro process number cess When the proccess starts up the bit correspon 0 to 15 ding to the process number turns on 1 DT90061 DT9061 Process Monitor using binary display number pops 15 7 0 Bit No DT90062 DT9062 Process b EA number DT 1 11 7 0 Pr N 32 to 47 5 z Process No DT90063 DT9063 E not executing 48 to 63 1 executing DT90064 DT9064 Process A programming tool software can be used to write data number 64 to 79 DT90065 DT9065 Process number 80 to 95 DT90066 DT9066 Process number 96 to 111 DT90067 DT9067 Process number 112 to 127 DT90104 DT9104 High speed counter The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed elapsed value area for counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is ch2 executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT90105 DT9105 DT9104 and DT9105 DT90104 and DT90105 The value can be written by executing a DMV F1 in struction DT90106 DT9106 High speed counter The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter target value area for specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored ch2 here DT90107 DT9107 Target values have been preset for the various instruc tions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset va lues can only be read and cannot be written 12 37
145. double speed inverter When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 reaches K4500 Y 1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R103 R100 LX DF H H Positioning operations running R100 R100 R101 H pr H Positioning operations start R101 F1 DMV KO DT 9044 F167HCIR K0 K5000 vo R101 YO Start signal to inverter High speed signal to inverter R100 H F61DCMP K4500 DT 9044 R100 R900C R102 Reaches deceleration point R102 1 H DF R Deceleration R903A R100 TO R103 Hor 4 perm im R103 TMX 0 K5 Completion pulse 0 5 seconds High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 1 Outline of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and control settings The pulse function enables positioning control by use in combination with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver Provides trapezoidal control with the instruction F168 for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed maximum speed acceleration deceleration time and target value Instruction F168 also enables automatic home return J OG operation with the instruction F169 for pulse output while the execution condition trigger i
146. during RUN the mode must be changed to RUN EDIT mode Change the mode as shown below After the rewrite change back to PROG EDIT mode to prevent accidental rewriting Procedure for changing to RUN EDIT mode EJ GCJC 9 9 E Procedure for changing to PROG EDIT mode FPO Precautions During Programming 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 8 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer Timer set value _ This method rewrites the V value in the program X0 TMX 5 K 30 prog T5 YO Rewrite Method Using FP Programmer II Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50 Procedure 1 Read the address containing the timer instruction tm st src READ READ sc x wx 3 A v v 2 Clear the constant K 30 HELP CLR 3 Enter the new constant K50 Operation and Cautions After the Change After the change the timer or counter in operation will continue to run Operation based on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condition changes from off to on When this method is used the program itself will change Thus when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is turned on the changed set value will be preset Precautions During Programming FPO 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter Du
147. during operation withoutaffecting the timer For detailed information m section 8 8 If deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET w nextpage Precautions During Programming FPO 8 Rewrite Function During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR FP Programmer Il Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Operation of SSTP STPE A distance with the same Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not each instruc number cannot be defined possible for a program with no step ladder area tion twice Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in An SSTP instruction cannot FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode be written in a subprogram In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a pro gram with a step ladder area JP LOOP LBL Be sure to write the instruc Write in the order J P LBL or LOOP LBL tion for setting the loop d E number before LB L LOOP Delete in the order LBL J P or LBL LOOP instructions 8 7 4 X Changing Modes in FP Programmer Changing program modes FP Programmer is normally in PROG EDIT mode which does not allow unintentional rewriting of programs To perform a rewrite
148. e 2 This instruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 83 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions ry i B 16 bit data S D D S D 5 subtraction F26 32 bit data subtraction Description 01 D 541 S D 1 D 16 bit data subtraction S1 52 D 32 bit data subtraction 5111 51 524 52 D 1 D 51 x S2 D D 16 bit data division 32 bit data division 5111 S1 x 5211 52 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 51 52 quotient D remainder DT9015 for FP O FP e FP 1 FP M FP3 or DT90015 for FPO T32 FPZ FP2 FP2SH FP 10S H 141 51 5211 52 quotient D 1 D remainder DT9016 DT9015 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or DT90016 DT90015 for FPO T32 FP X F P 2 FP2SH FP10SH 16 bit data multiplication result in 16 bits S1 x S2 D 16 bit data increment 32 bit data D 1 D increment PD 1 D 1 D 1 D D 12 84 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability i F Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FPI FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 85 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Leti 16 bit data D 1 D decrement F38 32 bit data D D 1 D D P38 decrement 32 bit data S2 5111 1 x
149. e D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 42 Minimum value word data 16 bit Minimum value double word data 32 bit Total and mean values word data 16 bit Total and mean values double word data 32 bit DMEAN PDMEAN Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with S 1 and S2 and stores itin the D The address relative to S1 is stored in 4 Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S 1 is stored in D42 The total value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with S 1 to the S2 are ob tained and stored in the D The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with S 1 to S52 are obtained and stored in the D Sort word data 16 bit SORT PSORT The word data with sign from the area specified by S 1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Sort double word data 32 bit DSORT PDSORT The double word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first 12 120 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table
150. e elapsed value of the high speed counter Two types of output control available Pulse output control Pattern output control FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 Y7 Y6 and Y7 selectable Pulse frequency 1440Hz to 5kHz 720Hz to 5kHz 360Hz to 5kHz 180Hz to 5kHz 90Hz to 5kHz 45Hz to 5kHz Switches between 6 ranges Internal connection between pulse output and counter input Not possible Not possible Possible Switching of the pulse frequency range is supported by CPU Ver 2 7 or later In versions prior to CPU Ver 2 7 the range is fixed at 360Hz to 5kHz In Ver 2 7 orlaterbutpriorto CPU Ver 2 9 switching is possible among 4 ranges 360Hz to 5kHz 180Hz to 5kHz 90Hz to 5kHz 45Hz to 5kHz In CPU Ver 2 9 and later versions switching is possible among 6 ranges 12 110 FP M C20T C20R C32T Specifications Number Availability 12 8 Table of Instructions N A A A C56 C16 C20 C32 rFP1 FP M A TET e A Available N A Not available 1 The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used 12 111 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand High speed counter Pulse output instr Description uction for FPO High speed counter output set with channel specification High speed counter output reset with channel specificat
151. e backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup bat tery and then replace battery if neces sary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error Terminal station settings were not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selector to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Multi C PU registra tion error CPU2 only Continues Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer IC memory card back up battery error Continues 55 Note Available PLC FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does notturn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed A Available 12 48 Specifications IC memory card back up battery error Continues Description and steps to take The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does notturn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guarante
152. e disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again il Example Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 ICTL S1 S2 R9034 The high speed counter will continue to count At 2 5 kHz or higher during one phase one channel counting or 1 25 Hz or higher during one phase two channel counting miscounts may occur Target value match on off instructions F166 F 167 will continue Coincidence programs will be disabled Pulse outputand PWM output will be stopped The F168 instruction positioning control will continue to operate However when the maximum output frequency is higher than 2 5 kHz during one phase one channel counting or 1 25 Hz during one phase two channel counting the output pulse number may differ from the set number FPO Precautions During Programming 8 7 3 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR FP Programmer II Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is ex ecuted online the program will be rewritten Block a Block b Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simulta neously with the change In the case of FP Programmer the mode must be changed See section 8 7 4 Operation of OT KP each instruction If an instruction written in block a
153. e ge cen 3 6 3 2 2 Input Specifications cere err RIXA RE Sete dws YEA 3 6 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON PONG o aaun dee a E da 3 7 3 2 3 Output Specifications 3 8 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type nissa 3 8 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type saasaa 3 9 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram ore eieiatess 3 10 3 3 1 Relay Output Type E8RS E8RM E16RS E16RM 3 10 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type EE LOO ERES 3 11 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type E16T E32T 3 11 3 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type E16P E32P 313 3 3 80 Expansion Input Units 8 16 3 14 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 222 pm 3 15 3 3 4 1 NPN Open Collector Type EBYT E16YT 3 15 3 3 4 2 PNP Open Collector Type E8YP E16YP 3 17 GAY o Cem 3 18 34 1 JESRSIESRM dese EXE EQEES 3 18 3 4 2 JEIORS EIDBM 5 23 b sre ate eb ot pet bet 3 19 VETT st a LER CHR ek 3 20 BAM CE VOR hicks ects ued ed ha tied a ER AOT 3 21 SAS E32T ed tee y goce Cee eve seu Y xe Du qeu 3 22 SAG ESL 22 3 23 204 7 OEC ire deste ay ete accus gt A een eee ee 3 24 30 7 SETA ettet 3 25 34 9 ree root Drei hob t ats eus 3 26 344410 DESY Paty eas vee were he
154. e high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is ex ecuted These preset values can only be read and cannot be written The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruc tion is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 The value can be written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter in struction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is ex ecuted These preset values can only be read and cannot be written 12 33 Specifications FPO 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT90052 DT9052 High speed counter control flag Description A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting stop high speed counter instruction F168 and clear the high speed counter Control code setting Control code 2j j j j Binary Software reset 0 Yes 1 No Count 0 Enable 1 Disable Hardware reset 0 Enable 1 Disable High speed counter clear 0 Continue 1 Clear Software is not reset HO 0000 Perform software reset H1 0001 Disable count
155. e output turned on and off when values match can be specified from YO to Y 7 as desired High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO This instruction is used for counter operations such as software resetand countdisable Specify this instruction together with the FO MV instruction and the special data register DT9052 DT 90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset Count enable disable Hardware reset enable disable Clear controls from high speed counter instructions F166 to F170 Clear target value match interrupt A il Example Performing a software reset X7 HDF MV H 1 DT9052 e D FO MV H 0 DT9052 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed Elapsed value change and read instruction F1 This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the F1 DMV instruction and the special data register DT9044 DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registe
156. eared e Inthe PROG mode the power supply can be turned OFF and then ON aganto clearthe error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing aself d agnostic error set i nstruction F148 ERR lt Procedure Follow the procedures descri bedin the table of error codes section 12 7 Ie Note When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT90138 If this happens monitor the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 1 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated andthe operati on of FPO has been stopped Proceduret Set the mode switch from RUN to PROG and turn the power OFF and then ON If the ERRO ALA RM LEDis turned ON again thereis probably an abnormalty inthe FPO Please contact your dealer If the ERROR ALARM LEDis blnked goto section 11 2 1 lt Procedure Set the mode switch from PROG to RUN If the ERRO WALA RM LEDisturned ON the program executi on timeis too long Check e ifinstructions such as JP or LOOP are programmedin such a way that a scan can never finish e thatinterruptinstructi ons are executedinsuccessi on 11 2 3 All LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check the power supply wir
157. ed 12 7 Error Codes Incompat ible IC memory card error Continues No unit for the con figuration Continues Self diag nostic error Stops set by F148 ERR P148 PERR Continues instruction The IC memory card installed is not com patible Replace the IC memory card compat ible with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 The MEWNET W2 link unitis not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is oc curred Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose A Available 12 49 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes J Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Error Name Description code NACK error Link system error WACK error Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware error Unit No setting error No support error Link system error Link system error Link system error Link system error No response error Link system error Buffer closed error Time out error Link system error Link system error Transmission impossible error Communication stop Link system error Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communica tion error
158. ed so please make sure that the built in backup battery have been charged before using the unit 12 The program system resisters and the hold type areas internal relay data register and counter are backed up by the built in EEPROM 13 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 100 000 or less 14 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 10 000 or less Control Units FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 3 Input Specifications fem Beseipion Insulation method optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current approx 4 3 mA at24 V DC Input impedance approx 5 6 Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Input points per C10RM 6 points common common Note 1 C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM 8 points common C14CRM C14RS C14CRS 6161 C16CT 8 points common C16P C16CP C32T C32CT 16 points common C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP ON voltage ON current 19 2 V orless 3 mA or less OFF voltage OFF current 2 4 V or more 1 mA or more Response time lt ON 50 us or less at X0 X1 Note 2 at 24 V DC and 25 100 us orless at X2 to X5 Note 2 C 66 F 2 ms or less at X6 to XF ON OFF Operating mode indicator I Notes 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply 2 through X5 are inputs for the high speed co
159. ed load voltage and external power supply for driving the internal circuit are the same In this situation there is only one power supply FPO E8YT E 16YT E Ly rN pe e Ld Df 9 O Output side Internal L Y20 Load e circuit i LEUTE Y2n Internal e Vv Load circuit J DW NS e e C I 24V DC External power supply ee ee and load voltage The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load voltage 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be connected FPO E8YT E 16YT LI LI LI LI Output side Tao a o Load for5 V Internal circuit YTN e XX oo o M T Y21 ota es o Load for 5 V e Internal circuit gt A Ka T la ZN LI LI 1 re Internal circuit amp Z 7 K v F Load for 24
160. el instructions are not available 12 103 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Basic function instruction STMR Special instructions Auxiliary timer 16 bit Hours min utes and seconds data to sec onds data Description Turn on the specified output and R900D after 0 01 s x set value Converts the hour minute and second data of S 1 S to seconds data and the converted data is stored in 1 D Seconds data to hours min utes and seconds data Carry flag R9009 set STC Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hour minute and second data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Turns on the carry flag R9009 Carry flag R9009 reset Turns off the carry flag R9009 12 104 FPO Specifications Availability PIED PIE t C32 Basic function instruction F137 A A A N A A N A A Special instructions 12 8 Table of Instructions F138 P138 F140 Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPX FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 2 On the FPO itis only possible to use F138 and F139 with the T32 type 12 105 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions N Operand Description F142 Watching WDT The time allowable scan time for the system of watching P142 dog timer PWDT dog timer
161. er control relay points MCR 32 points Number of labels J P and LOOP 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels FPO Control Units 2 2 Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C16P C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP Number of step ladders 128 stages 704 stages 128 stages Note 1 Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100sub 16 sub routines routines Number of interrupt programs 7 programs external 6 points internal 1 point 1 program internal 1 point Self diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer program syntax check Clock calender function Not available Available Not Note 3 available Special Pulse catch input Total 6 points Not functions to X1 50us available Interrupt input X2 to X5 100us RS232C port Transmission speeds 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200bit s Note 4 Transmission distance 3m 9 84ft P Terminal block 3 pin made by phoenix Contact Co aay Seeks products number MKDS 1 3 3 5 E Communication method Half duplex Periodical interrupt 0 5ms to 30s interval Constant scan Available Password Available High speed counter Counter mode Not juu Addition subtraction one phase Note 7 available Input point number Four channels maximum Maximum counting speed 10kHz maximum for all 4 channels Input contacts used X0 count input ch 0 X3 count in
162. er supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally FPO Wiring 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit Use the power supply cable AFP 0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Power suppl roe E Power supply cable AFP 0581 Green Function earth Frame ground Blue 0V Brown 24 V DC FPO control unit j connector 4T Rated voltage 24V DC 2 Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC gg Notes e To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable e To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective c
163. erially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S141 1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 5111 51 5241 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S141 S1 S2 1 S2 12 76 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability 32 bit data compare AND AND 32 bit data compare AND AND 32 bit data compare AND AND 32 bit data compare AND AND gt 32 bit data compare AND AND lt 32 bit data compare AND e A Available N A Not available 12 77 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description 32 bit data Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by compare comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition OR S141 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in par
164. erie n orte kun aues eda 3 23 Jw TEBA arema a n AEE a es le tet 3 24 JAE ELOX 3 25 croci Ote 3 26 3410 EBY exo 3 26 JALIL E AERE AES 3 27 dde 27 ELOY Bs cok iaa 3 3 28 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 1 Parts and Terminology 3 1 Parts and Terminology There are fourteen different expansion I O unit types available 1 e emae W N H O 14 LOT 9 5 Y oS O E8RS terminal type E16RS terminal type E8RM connector type E16RM connector type E16T E16P E32T E32P E8X inputtype E16X inputtype E8YT output type E8YP output type E16YT output type E16YP output type In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each expansion 1 0 unit Expansion I O Units FPO 3 1 Parts and Terminology 3 1 1 Expansion I O Unit Types E8RS E16RS E8RM E16RM terminal type connector type N ooo Ex a a a a a a a a a a N I a a of a a a E16T E16P E32T E32P p efn n uGn n n ufdhiotin nbono n E8X ERT 00000000 MENEMENE COOOOOOO MEANEN EN E16YT E16YP nBu
165. ernal power supply input for S LINK Suitable wires twisted wire Normal cross section surface area 0 5 to 1 25mm2 I Notes e The S LINK section is protected by a fuse but if too many input output devices are connected or if the current consumption is heavy enough to cause the fuse to blow we recommend providing a local power supply e A short circuit between D G or between D 24V triggers the protective circuit but there is no protection against short circuiting between G 24V or 0V 24V Be aware that a short circuit can cause a breakdown or malfunction FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies 4 4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies When turning on the power supplies to the S LINK control unit follow the sequence outlined below Procedure 1 Turnon the power supply to the S LINK devices connected to the S LINK system Turn on the external power supply to the S LINK Last turn on the power supply to the S LINK control unit itself ANS H 3 5 7 oooooo n Feu ESES 1 Power supply of S LINK devices on o m oo t 3 24V ov 2 External power supply for S LINK on NAIS del 3 Power supply of S LINK control unit on If using the power supply of booster start up the booster before the ex
166. error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR LED ERROR ALARM LED turns on Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR LED ERROR ALARM LED will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a Self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR LED ERROR ALARM LED turn
167. error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated 2 1 1 2 Mode Switch This switch turns ON and OFF RUN PROG the operation of the FPO The FPO can also be turned ON and OFF by the programming tool Switch position Operation mode RUN upward This sets the RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins PROG downward This sets the PROG mode When performing remote switching from the programming tool the position of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED Otherwise restart the FPO and change the mode of operation with the mode switch 2 1 1 3 Tool Port The tool port is used to connect a programming tool Pin assignment Pin no Abbreviation SD TXD SG RD RXD 5V FPO Control Units 2 2 Specifications 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 General Specifications em Bexrpin Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated current consumption 300 mA orless section 2 2 1 2 Allowed momen 610 614 5 ms at21 6 V 10 ms at24 V tary power offtime 10 ms at 21 6 V 10 ms at 24 V T32 SL1 Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Storage temperature 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Storage humidity 30 to 85 R
168. etails see F144 TRNS instruction The data register to be used as the transmission table is specified using the F144 TRNS instruction Data transmission is executed using the F144 TRNS instruction There is no restriction on the number of bytes that can be transmitted Any number of bytes may be sent as long as it does not exceed the range that can be used by the data register Table for transmission Trans mitted data storage area External device PC etc 10 3 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 3 Data Reception Data sent from an external device is received at the RS232C port The received data is automatically stored in the data register specified as the reception buffer For details see F144 TRNS instruction Data registers used as reception buffers are specified by system register 417 and 418 Data reception is enabled by the F144 TRNS instruction Reception buffer Reception Received data storage area External device bar code reader etc 10 4 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 2 System Register Settings 10 2 System Register Settings Preparation for Sending and Receiving Data System Register Set
169. f each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected AND stack Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel Push stack Stores the operated result up to this instruction Read stack Pop stack Leading edge differ ential Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge differ ential Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected 12 54 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability m gt FP2SH gt FP10SH Leading edge AND gt Trailing edge AND Leading edge OR Trailing edge OR Leading edge out Trailing edge out Alternative out AND stack OR stack Push stack Read stack Pop stack Leading edge differ ential Trailing edge differ ential Ie Note A Available N A Not available 12 55 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description Leading Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge edge differ of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection is pos ential initial
170. fn n uhn in n All expansion I O unit types CONNECTOR FPO Expansion I O Units 3 1 Parts and Terminology DA Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC Itis connected using the power supply cable AFP 0581 that comes with the unit 2 Input terminal 9 pin 3 Output terminal 9 pin The inputand outputterminals 2 and 3 use a terminal block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co product number 1840434 section 7 6 Input connector 9 pin 6 Output connector 9 pin The input and output connectors 6 and 6 use a connector made by Molex apan Co product number 51067 0900 section 7 7 DO Input connector 10 pin 43 Output connector 10 pin 9 Input connector 10 pin x 2 Output connector 10 pin x 2 Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 7 to 2 section 7 8 65 8 Expansion hook is used to secure expansion units Expansion connector connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the expansion I O unit section 6 1 42 DIN rail attachment lever allows simple attachment to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on FPO slim type mounting plate AFP 0803 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 2 Specifications 3 2 S pec ifications 3 2 1 General Specifications For more details on the general specifications refer to section 2
171. from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment display with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below BCD arithmetic instructions F40 B to F58 DB 1 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 to F38 D 1 as operation in the PLC takes place in binary Input From a Digital Switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 BIN wa ESTEE TEN eee LETI Data inputted into ofo o is oT Eee PLC x Conversion usin BIN F81 BIN Data which can bee 1 1 1 1 1 1 instruction processed in the PLC BIN data Converted to 1992 in decimal data Precautions During Programming FPO 8 2 Handling BCD Data Output to a 7 segment Display with Decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 BCD PLC BIN Conversion using F80 BCD instruction 7 segment display TEN 1992 Pee d ats CICICIC ORRRRROCEOOD Pte cb da 1 9 9 2 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 1 Index Registers Like other registers index registers have two points IX and IY for reading and writi
172. g will be valid No 402 H1 No 403 H1 12 23 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System EEE Tool port 414 RS232C port set ting Tool port setting C Registers Default value Unit number setting for tool port when connecting NET Communication format setting for tool port Setting item SDefault setting value SModem communication Disabled SData length character bits 8 bits Baud rate setting for tool port Baud rate setting for tool port and RS232C port Setting by Setting by FP pro grammer Description K1 to K32 Unit No 1 to 32 Using programming tool software Select items from the menu Using FP programmer Il Specify the setting contents using H con stants 15 6 0 Modem communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Data length character bits 0 8 bits 1 7 bits When connecting a modem set the unit number to 1 with system resister 410 HO 0 9600 bit s programming 1 19200 bit s H e Tool port H0 9600 bit s H1 19200 bit s RS232C port H0 19200 bit s H1 9600 bit s 4800 bit s 2400 bit s 1200 bit s 600 bit s 300 bit s If anything other than HO or H1is set for the tool port baud rate the baud rate will be 9600 bit s If 19 200 bit s is set for both the tool port and RS232C port H100 should be written 12 24 FPO Specifications 12 4 Table of System Registers Address
173. ge 9 32 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output instruction F169 This instruction is for OG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on X2 Fo MV H112 DT200 FO MV K300 DT201 F169 PLS DT200 HO While X2 is in the on state a pulse of 300 Hz with a duty ratio of 10 is output from Y 0 At this time directional output Y 2 is off and the count of the elapsed value for the high speed counter CHO DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 increases X6 H Fo Mv H123 DT200 FO MV K700 DT201 F169 PLS DT200 H1 While X6 is in the on state a pulse of 700 Hz with a duty ratio of 10 is output from Y1 At this time directional output Y 3 is off and the count of the elapsed value for the high speed counter CH1 DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 decreases High speed counter control instruction F0 This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse outputs and setting and resetting the near home input Specify this instruction together with the FO MV instruction and the special data register DT9052 DT 90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Clear controls stopping the pulse outputs from high speed counter in
174. gisters Available type T32 Not used KO to K144 With the FPO C10 C 14 C 16 C 32 SL 1 values Set with the programming tool become invalid K0 to K144 Set the system regis ters 5 and 6 to the same value KO to K63 KO to K16384 Not used Available type C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Hold or non hold setting for step ladder process Available type T32 With the FPO C10 C14 C16 C 32 SL1 values set with the programming tool become invalid Hold Non hold Not used Action on error Disable or enable setting for duplicated output Disable will be syntax error Enable will not be syntax error Not used Operation setting when an verification error occurs Stop Continuation Not used Operation setting when an operation error occurs Stop Continuation Operation settings when communication error occurs in the remote I O S LINK system Stop Continuation 12 16 Specifications Default value illius ce ARN Action on Not used 12 4 Table of System Registers Description error Not used With the FPO values set with the program ming tool become invalid Time Unused setting 28 29 4 30 K2600 6500 ms Wait time setting for multi frame communication K4 to K32760 10 ms to 81900 ms Used of default setting K2600 6500 ms is recommended set value x 2 5 ms 2 Wai
175. gnizing the Address Before the S LINK system is being operated for the first time turn on the power supply and then press the system SET button When the system SET button is pressed the number of connected devices recognized by S LINK control unit blinks on the error address display in hexadecimal Auk ERROR BD m ADDRESS zm t im H H VS ERROR ADDRESS display Ne o0 Displaying in hexadecimal RUN PROG SET z z System SET button If the actual number of connected devices differs from the number displayed since an unrecognized S LINK device exists check for address overlapping improper connection etc Subsequently an error check is carried out based on this status When an address is recognized that status is stored in the EEPROM so itis not necessary to press the system SET button after that point each time the power supply is turned on When the power supply is switched on for the first time after completing the S LINK system wiring an arbitrary error display may appear This does not indicate any abnormal operation If the system SET button is pressed this display is erased If an error address is displayed during operation confirm the address and then turn off the power supply correctthe address atthe location where the error occurred and turn the power supply on again Check to make sure the error address display has disappeared Do not press the system SE
176. hen Power Supply is Turned On 4 10 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 11 4 6 1 Recognizing the Address 4 11 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O Device 4 12 J udging Errors from the Error Indicators 4 13 J udging Errors Address Displays 4 14 S LINK Control Unit FPO FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 1 Names and Functions 4 1 Names and Functions nn E RUN SDru Q B EE LL 9 EINEN NAP NE O H3 9 AURI 4 0 oO e B PROG SET oO 24V a OQ i E 5 G o QO INL 24V a O ov o Sg N Cat Wy D Le J 0 4 Status indicator LED The LED display the operation mode and error statuses 2 ERROR ADDRESS display 2 digit hexadecimal display The address at which the S LINK system error occurred is displayed 3 Mode switch The mode switch changes the operation mode 4 Transmission indicator SEND This flashes when input or output data is transmitted between the various units of the S LINK system 6 ERROR indicators These light if an error occurs in the S LINK system ERR1 Error 1 Short circuit between D G line ERR2 Unused ERR3 Error 3 Abnormal voltage level between D G l
177. hifted in order toward D2 12 96 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 FP FP2SH m m Data shift instructions F98 N A A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPZ FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 97 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions E a Data table shift in and compress Right shift of multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data Description Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Shifts the n bits of D to the right Left shift of multiple bits n bits ina 16 bit data Shifts the n bits of D to the left Right shift of n bits ina 32 bit data Left shift of n bits ina 32 bit data Right shift of one hexa decimal digit 4 bit Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left Shifts the one digit of data of D to the right Left shift of one hexade cimal digit 4 bit Right shift of multiple bits n bits Shifts the one digit of data of D to the left Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the right Left shift of multip
178. his sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting system register 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by setting it to the value 144 the whole area becomes the timer 12 14 FPO Specifications 12 4 Table of System Registers Hold types and non hold type settings System registers 6 to 8 and 14 With the FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 the areas held in the event of a power supply interruption are fixed at the areas shown in the table below and the settings for system registers 6 to 8 and 14 will be invalid C10 C14 C16 Non hold type All points Non hold type From the set value to C139 Hold type 4 points elapsed values C140 to C143 Internal relay Non hold type 976 points RO to R60F 61 words WRO to WR60 d type 32 points R610 to R62F 2 words WR61 to WR62 Data register n hold type 1652 words DTO to DT1651 C32 SL1 Counter Non hold type From the set value to C127 Hold type 16 points elapsed values C128 to C143 Internal relay n hold type 880 points RO to R54F 55 words WRO to WR54 d type 128 points R550 to R62F 8 words WR55 to WR 62 Data register n hold type 6112 words DTO to DT6111 d type 32 words DT6112 to DT6143 Setting value n Hold type size increases Setting Setting value gt n value n Non hold type size increases For normal situations setthe system registe
179. ial Communications 10 10 1 2 10 10 1 3 Data Reception 10 System Register Settings 10 Operations When Using General use Serial 10 10 3 1 If None is Setfor Start and Terminal Codes oos teo ed e e ER tees 10 10 3 2 If Yes has been Setfor the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Codes ETX suu ver bax ce DERE EE S 10 gt U UJ UJ General use Serial Communications 10 2 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 1 General use Serial Communications Using the RS232C port data and commands can be sent to and received from an external device such as a bar code reader This is done by executing the F144 TRNS instruction Transmission and reception are not enabled in the default settings so system register 412 must be changed to a general use port K2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are set using system register 413 and 414 10 1 2 Data Transmission Any desired data register can be prepared as the transmission table and the data Stored in that table transmitted Start and terminal codes are automatically added to the data being transmitted and the data is sent For d
180. ied for forced input output At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Timer T and Counter C Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence ata contactspecified for forced input output Atthis time the contact ofthe timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Precautions During Programming FPO 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only Ckock Calendar timer setting area The write area and read area for clock calendar timer is allocated to special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 Special data register Upper byte Lower byte number DT90053 Hour data Minute data US HOO to H23 00 to H59 ot Available DT90054 Minute data Second data HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Availab DT90055 Day data Hour data F Ava H01 to H31 to H23 DT90056 Year data Month data A 00 to H99 H01 to H12 i DT90057 Day of week data Avai HOO to H06 ilab ilab Clock Calendar timer setti
181. ime of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained FPO Precautions During Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method fic Example 2 Using the CT instruction between J P and LBL instructions RO c 1 X0 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO X0 Counting operation Final timing at which the previous J P instruction was not executed The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous J P instruction was not executed has not been changed and the execution condition X0 for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO X0 Counting operation Final timing at which the The count is incremented because the count input previous J P changed from off to on after the final timing at which instruction the previous J P instruction was not executed was not executed Precautions During Programming FPO 8 6 Precautions for Programming 8 6 Precautions for Programmin Programs which do not execute correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not execute correctly Program example 1 Program in which the example 1 is rewritten ANS X0 X0 YO Hor ei H Hor X2 C X0 X2 Program example 2 Program in which the example 2 is rewritten ANS TMXS der vo Xl TMX5 K30 YO T H NU gt 2 I 34 Program example 3 Program in which the example 3 is rewritten PSHS X0 X1 YO X0
182. imultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 12 19 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers Default value High speed Setting by counter mode programming settings X3 to tool software X5 Notes Description 9 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter 2 phase input X3 X4 2 phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X5 Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Direction decision X3 X4 10 Direction decision X3 X4 Reset input X5 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 e Ifthe operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH3 is invalid e If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH3 takes precedence e If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 12 20 FPO Specifications 12 4 Table of System Registers Default
183. ine ERRA Error 4 Broken wire or S LINK device error 6 System SET button Pressing the system SET button reads the connection status for the S LINK system and stores itin the memory In subsequent operation the S LINK unit checks for errors using the connection status registered at this time The output unit data effective at the time that the system SET button was pressed is retained w nextpage S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 1 Names and Functions D S LINK terminal block 6 pin The power supply and signal wires of the S LINK system are connected to the S LINK terminal block The S LINK terminal block can be detached from the FPO S LINK control unit for wiring operations For detailed information refer to section 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block 8 Tool port RS232C The tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 9 Power supply connector Supply 24V DC to the power supply connector It is connected using the power supply cable AF P 0581 that comes with the unit RS232C port Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port such as an I O P a bar code reader or an image checker enabling data input and output Tool port RS232C specifications Pin assignment Pinno Abbreviation SD TXD SG RD RXD 5V Settings when shipped from the factory Default value Baud rate 9600bps Character bit 8bits Parity check O dd Stop
184. ing Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FPO control unit is in the range of the rating Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FPO control unit is shared with them If the LEDs on the FPO control unit turn ON at this moment the capacity of the power supply is not enough to control other devices as well Prepare another power supply for other devices or increase the capacity of the power supply 11 7 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Check of output condition output indicator LEDs are ON lt Procedure 1 gt Check the wiring of the loads lt Procedure 2 gt Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again If the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the FPO s output circuit Please contact your dealer Check of output condition output indicator LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned ON there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing ON the output using a programming tool If the output indicator LED is turned ON go to input condition che
185. ing the MOLEX Connector Type 0 ccc cece eee eee nn Wiring the MIL Connector Type iussus optet ut ub E rite pe Ra ces 7 8 1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring cece cece eee ees Wiring the RS 2326 FOR ocu ced che PR ore Chapter8 Precautions During Programming 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Use of Duplicated Output 8 1 1 Duplicated Output oco resta or Oan dase te 8 1 3 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST oos ue Rr RED aad Handling BCD Data uia astu ue Yd d eure ttis B2 ZBCD3DSlS ors RR SAO 8 2 2 Handling BCD Data Handling Index Registers aii tice x uo educ end acr co aw Gus la index Registers Aco e hs to 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers 8 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Luuueusue Operation Errors enit dati Cil tertius pte Es dr aud aded 8 4 1 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs 8 4 3 8 4 4 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time
186. ion FPO T32 DT90022 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT9021 No of units connected Available type to S LINK error SL1 address 15 876543210 ie When normal No of units connected 0 to 128 0 to H80 Note S When the SET switch is pressed the number ofinput outputunits connected to the S LINK system is set If the same address has been specified for multiple units the units are counted as a single unit This is invalid however if an ERRA error is in progress If ERR4 occurs 876543210 Multiple errors 0 Single 1 Multiple Error address 0 to 127 0 to H7F ae Initial address if there are multiple errors DT9022 Scan time current The current scan time is stored here Scan time is value calculated using the formula Note Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 K50 indicates 5ms Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode 12 31 Specifications FPO 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address FPO T32 DT90023 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT9023 Scan time minimum value Note 1 Description The minimum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 K50 indicates 5ms DT90024 DT90025 Note 2 D
187. ion Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of 51 5 Turns output Y n off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of 5 1 5 Positioning control with chan nel specifi cation Pulse output PLS with chan nel specifi cation Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output YO or Y 1 according to the contents of the data table begin ning at S Outputs a pulse from the specified output YO or Y 1 ac cording to the contents of the data table beginning at S PWM output PWM with chan nel specifi cation Performs PWM output from the specified output YO or Y 1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S 12 112 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability High speed cou utput i F166 A Available N A Not available The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used 12 113 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean High speed counter Pulse output instr Operand Description uction for FPX FO High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls counter and DT90052 according to the control code specified by S The control Pulse output code is stored in DT90052 controls F1 Change
188. ion Max 58 Max 62 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 unit 1 When config ured with same output type as control unit With expansion Max 106 Max 110 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 unit 2 When relays and transistors are mixed Program memory Built in memory BuiltinEEPROM without battery Built in EEPROM without BultinEEPROM without batey Program capacity 2 720 steps Pu e 000 5 000 steps steps steps Numbers of instruction Basic High level us Operation speed 0 9us step by basic instruction refresh and base time Operation Relay With no expansion board 0 3ms With expansion board s 0 3ms and 1 x number of expansion boards ms 1 008 points RO to R62F 1 008 1 008 points RO points RO to 62 to R62F Note 1 Intemal relay R Special internal relay R Timer Counter T C 64 points R9000 to R903F 144 points initial setting is 100 timer points TO to T99 44 counter points C100 to C143 Note 2 Timer range 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s selected by instruction Data register DT 1 660 words DTO to DT1659 6 144 16 384 words words DTO to DTO to DT6143 DT16383 Note 1 6 144 words DTO to DT6143 112 words DT9000 to DT9111 112 words DT90000 to DT90111 112 words DT9000 Special data register DT Index register 2 words IX IY Differential points DF DF Unlimited of points Mast
189. ion FPO C14RS Reference measurements for wiring 8 5 0 335 3 5 0 138 25 0 0 984 Approx 100 0 3 937 R 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 n 5 S EXPANSION z CONNECTOR al 2 1 z Z sree m m n 3 ROG n 9 3 a 5 yall o an 5 D Sg 5 8 B 8 8 8 dr E 8 i Y Q Q y cda F gt a S 7 5 0 295 DIN rail DIN EN50022 35 1 378 attachment gap Y unit mm in A 1 2 FPO CIORM C1O0CRM C14RM C 14CR M E 8R M E 16RM Illustration FP0 C14RM Reference measurements for wiring 10 0 394 3 5 0 138 Approx 100 0 3 937 60 0 2 362 25 0 0 984 60 0 2 362 A TARA AA AAA Ae S E EXPANSION Q EJ I j 1 TIE LS 3 D e o Ele Tl ce ic nsm a o zl m JE 1 E i 3 Q Q y Q y lt L 5 7 5 0 295 DIN rail DIN EN50022 35 1 378 attachment gap Y unit mm in Dimensions A 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit A 1 3 FPO CI6T C16CT C16P C 16CP E 16T E 16P E 8X E 8YT E8YP E 32T E32P E 16X E 16YT E 16YP
190. iption Control unit Size AWG 124 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area 0 3 to 1 25 mm Analog I O unit Size AWG 28 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area 0 08 to 1 25 mm Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models are marketed by P hoenix Contact Co Manufacturer Cross sectional Size Product number area mm Phoenix Contact Co AWG 324 0 25 6 AWG 20 0 5 6WH AWG 418 Al 0 75 6GY AWG 418 1 6RD Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Type CRIMPFOX UD6 Product number 1204436 When tightening the terminals of the terminal block socket use a screwdriver P hoenix Contact Co Product no 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less 7 14 FPO Wiring Procedure 555 Notes When 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 7 mm 0 276 in Suitable wire Insert the wire into the terminal block socket until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Clockwise removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration Af
191. ircuit e The regulator on the FPO unit is a non insulated type e If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit aluays make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse next page Wiring FPO 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit e Isolate the wiring systems to the FPO input output devices and motor devices Circuit breaker os o Motor os devices w Insulated DC yo power devices Mom ro 3 wer gt Supply e The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned OFF before the input output power supplies e If the input output power supplies are turned OFF before the power to the control unit the FPO control unit may detect a drop in the input level and malfunction e Besureto supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power ON and OFF simultaneously for both FPO Wiring 7 3 Grounding 7 3 Grounding Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in Situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 2 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Q Other Other AN device CORRECT tase Notes e The point of grounding should be as close
192. is changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan update F143 Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number specified by D1 to the P143 update PIORF number specified by D2 Serial data TRNS The COM port receive flag R9038 is set to off to enable communica reception tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port Sends the data to another station in the network MEWNET Receives the data to another station in the network MEWNET Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs itto the word external output relay WY specified by D Stores the self diagnostic error number n in DT9000 for diagnostic n K100 FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or DT90000 for FPO T32 FP x error set to K299 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH turns R9000 on and turns on the ERROR LED 12 106 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions FP1 1 i N A N A A N A A A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPX FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 2 Available for FP1C24C C40C C56C and C72C FP M C20RC C20TC C32TC 12 107 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions ae 149 Message S Displays the character constant of S in the connected 13 P149 display programming tool Data read Reads the data from the intelligent
193. l a E 1kQ circuit Let A 5 6 kQ T e e Jen E 24V DC Intemal 1 45 JA MN 1kQ ma circuit b sss ss Note e e COM Output side ay e Y IntemalL p Y20 Load circuit Internal Wi c Load 9 circuit o cos 24V DC e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e Thel O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 3 Expansion Input Units ESX E 16X FPO E8X E 16X Input id 5 6 kQ X20 e ONE i arut a LS 1ka circuit 2 lies xpi 9 e 5 6 Xn a e Oo 9 Internal 1 V AL 1ko circuit 1 COM e e ju 24 V DC Note e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 3 3 4 1 NPN Open Collector Type E8YT E 16YT When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rat
194. ld if the Number of points words of the power backed up power supply using supply fixed hold areas in the various fails are built in fails are memories fixed and charge fixed and Counters 4 points are able sec are Internal relays 32 points retained ondary retained Date registers 8 words by the battery so by the Note 13 EEPROM the hold EEROM Number type Number of points memory of points words of areas can words of the fixed be speci the fixed hold areas fied using hold areas in the the pro in the various gramming various memories tools memories Counters Note 11 Counters 16 points 16 points Memory Internal re areas Internal re lays 128 which can lays 128 points be speci points Date fied Date Timers registers registers Counters 32 words 32 words Internal re Note Note lays Data 14 14 registers Ie Notes 1 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 2 The proportion of timer points to counter points can be changed using a system register 5 FPO Control Units Notes 2 2 Specifications 3 Precision of calender timer At O0 C 32 F less than 139 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 72 seconds error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 169 seconds error per month This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation coefficient va
195. le N A Not available 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP 10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 12 63 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description Subroutine instructions Subroutine Executes the specified subroutine When returning to the call main program outputs in the subroutine program are mi cea n maintained Output off Executes the specified subroutine When returning to the type subrou main program all outputs in the subroutine program are tine call H cal 0 set to off Subroutine Indicates the start of the subroutine program n entry Subroutine Ends the subroutine program return Interrupt instructions Interrupt Indicates the start of the interrupt program n Interrupt Ends the interrupt program return Interrupt ICTL control Select interrupt enable disable or clear in 5 1 and S2 and execute E H or Ticr 51 52 j 12 64 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Subroutine call Output off type subrou tine call Subroutine entry Subroutine return Interrupt instructions A Interrupt return Interrupt A A A control I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine progra
196. le bits n bits Right shift of one word 16 bit Left shift of one word 16 bit Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to the left Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one hexa decimal digit 4 bit Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the right 12 98 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP1 1 M M 1 C16 C20 C32 gt dj ED LA 24 gt gt gt gt D gt z m e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPX FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 99 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions ry 7 Left shift of one hexade cimal digit 4 bit FIFO buffer define Description Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to the left The n words beginning from D are defined in the buffer Data read from FIFO buffer The oldest data beginning from S that was written to the buffer is read and stored in D Data write into FIFO buffer Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN UDC 5 counter Left right LRSR D1 D2 shift register Data rotate instructions 16 bit data right rotate The
197. lts are equal in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the F60 CMP to F63 DWIN comparison instructions Auxiliary timer Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the timing oper contact ation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction It turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port error flag This turns on when an error occurs during communication with a program ming tool Constant scan error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 flag during constant scan execution R9011 R9012 Always off relay Always off Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan 12 26 FPO Specifications 12 5 Table of Special Internal Relays Address Name Description amp Initial on pulse relay Turns on only atthe first scan in the operation Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state Initial off pulse Turns off only atthe first scan in the operation relay Turns on from the second scan and maintains the on state Step ladder initial Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the on pulse relay process the moment step ladder process is opened Not used 0 01 s clock pulse Repeats on off opera
198. lue BIN DOHA Method 3 Method using the program high level instruction To change a set value of timer counter based on an input condition use a high level instruction as shown below to rewrite the value in the set value area SV of the desired timer or counter Example Changing the set value to K20 when input RO turns on RO L F0 Mv K20 SV3 R1 TMX 3 K50 When RO turns on the timer set value o changes from 5 seconds to 2 seconds T3 YO m 8 26 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output Processing when forced input output is initiated during RUN Forced reset reset processing Y Input output update Y Forced set reset processing Y Operation Y Forced set reset processing Y Peripheral service Processing of external input X Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the input LED will notblink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten Contacts notspecified will read in the on off state according to the condition ofthe input from the input device Processing of external output Y Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specif
199. lue based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of 5V and the battery backup voltage of 3V Also F157 and F158 time date addition and subtraction instructions cannot be used 4 When using the RS232C port for communication we recommend using resend processing The driver IC for the RS 232C is in full conformance with EIA TIA 232E and CCITT V 28 standards 5 The combinations 1 phase x 2 channels and 2 phases x 1 channel are also possible for the high speed counter 6 The internal relay data register and timer counter hold areas of the T32CT control unit 10 k step type can be changed by the system registers The number of points in the table is the value when the system registers are initial values 7 The max counting speed 10kHz is the counting speed with a rated input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of 25 C The counting speed frequency will decrease depending on the voltage and temperature 8 If both reset inputs X0 and X1 are reset X2 will be the reset input of X1 In the same way for X3 and X4 X5 acts as the reset input of X4 9 With a CPU of Ver 1 2 or a subsequent version the frequency will be 0 15Hz to 1kHz 10 The maximum is 9 5kHz when the positioning control instruction F168 is executed 11 Precautions when using the battery backup function Secondary chargeable battery is used as backup battery in the FPO T32C control unit The battery is not charged before the unit is shipp
200. m has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 The ICTL instruction cannot be used with the FP M C16T Interrupt masking and clearing are not possible The interrupt operation is possible using the interrupt setting of the system register 403 12 65 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting MEWTOCOL COM response control H H 0 5 51 m J Description Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Setthe system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool portfor MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant System registers 40 to No 47 changing 1 Hsysz2 s p1 02 Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function 12 66 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Name Availability Communica N A N A N A N A tion condi
201. ment l lever Slotted screwdriver FPO Installation 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of FPO slim type mounting plate AF P0803 to mounting panel For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FPO slim type mounting plate see section A 4 FPO slim type mounting plate Screw due h Mounting panel VF E 1r 55 m d q q 107 E Screw Gs 8 6 0 mm 0 236 in 03 Procedure 1 Fit the upper hook of the FPO unit onto the FPO slim type mounting plate 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the FPO unit into position FPO slim type mounting plate FPO unit When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the FPO slim type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example Two expansion units FPO slim type mounting plate Dia 5 0 0 197 60 0 2 362 Dia 5 0 0 197 Dia 5 0 0 197 50 0 1 968 unit mm in Installation FPO 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of FPO flat type mounting plate
202. mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode 2 Used by the system 12 32 Specifications Address FPO T32 DT90038 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT9038 Work 2 for F96 SRC instruction 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Description The position of the first matching data counting from the starting 16 bit area is stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is executed DT90039 to DT90043 DT9039 to DT9043 Not used DT90044 DT9044 DT90045 DT90046 DT90047 DT90048 DT90049 DT90050 DT90051 DT9045 DT9046 DT9047 DT9048 DT9049 DT9050 DT9051 High speed counter elapsed value for 0 High speed counter target value for chO High speed counter elapsed value area for chi High speed counter target value area for chi The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruc tion is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 The value can be written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter in struction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when th
203. n The program jumps to the label instruction and continues LBL n from there the number of jumps is set in S H L A L00P ns H Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger H GRK turns on in the TEST RUN mode only End The operation of program is ended Indicates the end of a main program RU AE Ly cages ae operation of program is ended when the trigger turns Eject EJECT Adds page break for use when printing E EJ ECT Step ladder instructions Start step SSTP The start of program n for process control SSTP Next step Start the specified process n and clear the process cur rently started Scan execution type Start the specified process n and clear the process cur rently started Pulse execution type Clear step Resets the specified process n CSTP H Clear multi Resets multiple processes specified by n1 and n2 ple steps H SCLR nl n2 4 Step end End of step ladder area 12 62 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability FP M C24 C56 C16 C2 C40 C72 C32 Loop A A Label Break N A N A N A N A N A N A N A End A A A A A Conditional A A A A A A A A end Step ladder instructions Next step NSTL Next step NSTP Clear step Clear multi ple steps e A Availab
204. n Table Analog I O Unit The I O allocations of the analog I O unitare determined by the position at which the unit is installed Second expansion Input CHO 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to 6 First expansion Third expansion Input CH1 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY2 wy4 WY6 Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y AF Y 60 to Y 6F A D Converter Unit and Thermocouple Unit The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which contains the conversion data switch flag Type Firstexpansion Second Third expansion expansion Input CHO 2 4 6 WX2 WXA WX6 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Input CH1 3 5 7 WX3 WX5 WX7 16 points X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F D A Converter Unit The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which contains the conversion data switch flag A04V Second expansion Third expansion A04I Input 16 points WX2 4 WX6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output CH0 2 4 6 16 points WY2 Y20 to Y2F 4 Y40 to Y4F WY6 Y 60 to Y6F Output CH1 3 5 7 16 points 1 0 Link Unit The allocation of the link unit is determined by order of connection Type Firstexpansion Second Third expansion expansion Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 t
205. ndex register RO I F0 MV DTO IXDTO In this case index register IX modifies the address of data register DTO If data in IX is larger than the last address of the data register an operation error will occur If the PLC you are using is of the FPO 16 point type the last address of the data register is DT1659 If the data in IX exceeds the range of KO to K255 an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of IX are negative Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt gt BIN data conversion Example When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO H I F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result Example When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO I F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur Check if the divisor of a division instruction is KO il Example RO I F32 9e DTO DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is KO an operation error will occur FPO Precautions During Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions Using the Leading Edge Detection Operation DF
206. ng 16 bit data Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is also called index modification il Example Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register I F0 MV DT100 IXDTO Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of IX with DTO acting as a base For example when IX contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when IX is K20 the destination will be DT20O In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT IXWXO IXWY 1 IXWRO IXSVO IXEV2 IXDT100 Constants can also be modified IXK10 IXH1001 An index register cannot modify another index register IXIX IXIY When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with IX In this case IX and IY are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of IY Contents of IX Precautions During Programming FPO 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly Reading in External Data A
207. ng There are three ways to set the clock calendar timer as follows When using the Windows version of FPWIN 1 While online open the setting menu by selecting Tool and then Set PLC Date and Time 2 Enter the Date and Time and press OK Set PLC Date and Time Ej PIC Home Date Gry7mm dd o 0 j a i E Cancel Time hhcmmoss Help joo foo joo When using DOS version software 1 While online select Monitor and then Data monitor 2 Select Save data f6 and then save data registers DT90054 to DT90057 3 Select Write ON f4 and Data write f7 in that order and then write a value FPO Precautions During Programming 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only Setting and changing using a program 1 Transfer the value to be written into special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 that are allocated in clock calendar timer setting area 2 Write H8000 to DT90058 Note Execute the transfer using P type derivative execution instruction or transfer in the order of H8000 to H0000 iV Example With X0 on adjust to the 5th day 12 00 00 XO HDF Fo Mv H DT9054 Set0 minutes and 0 seconds Fo MV H 512 DT9055 Set 5th day 12 o clock Fo Mv H8000 DT9058 Adjust time Caution regarding backup of clock calendar timer data Clock Calendar timer values are backed up in the secondary battery Do notuse until the secondary battery has
208. nit Then tum off the power and replace the unit with a new one A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link sys tem is installed on the slave station Remove the illegal unit from the slave station The number of slots or I O points used for MEWNET F remote I O system exceeds the limitation Re configure the system so that the number of slots and I O points is within the specified range overlap or I O setting that is over the range is detected in the allocated I O and MEWNET F I O map Re configure the I O map correctly mapping for remote I O terminal boards remote I O terminal units and I O link unit is not correct Re configure the I O map for slave sta tions according to the I O points of the slave stations A Available 12 44 Specifications IC card read error I O error Selectable Description and steps to take When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or pro gram switching due to F14 PGRD instruction C memory card is not installed There is no program file or itis dam aged Writing is disabled There is an abnormality in the AUTO EXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larg erthan the capacity of the CPU Install an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the re
209. nstruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions Such as MC and MCE instructions JP and LBL instructions LOOP and LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instructions Subroutine instructions 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time Operation of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation Not executed Executed If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode use R9014 initial pulse off relay in your program on the following page R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on atthe second scan FPO Precautions During Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method fic Example 1 DF leading edge differential instruction YO pF V X0 R9014 YO Ho Add R9014 RUN Power on m Even if XO was initially on the input condition X0 for the DF instruction is off to on atthe second scan therefore derivative output is obtained M n Example 2
210. nt gap A 2 FPO Power Supply Unit 35 0 19 2 60 0 1 378 7 756 2 362 O mal input 262 d EUN terminal RUE AN Connection Niz terminal cal g NA Output AN terminal NA 7 33 unit mm in Dimensions A 3 Mounting on DIN Rail 3 Mounting on DIN Rail a DIN rail n i N O A ME UM o o em X oer ow OT 0 c oo oo oo oo o RUN 19 10 10 10 O H Hizal HIH Seale ela Hizal diss rA nx ao ao aa ao DIN o sO a so n s0 5 ral in M allfa a eS e e ffe le allie a ISEN a0 es 2 BIETER DN EESTI IEEE LEITET AN 5 5 5 N fum 55 Es Es AH HIHH E e E H H el AEH g co g 00 Fo Fo Fo Fo m N ROG war w e i E WF Yo Yer Yr st m 3B ae p UB A C Bid HB Hid B Hilo gl C m 40 40 40 40 o o sti so sti sti d 6 0O O e
211. nte ger not ex ceeding the floating point type data Floating point type data to 32 bit inte ger conver sion the largest inte ger not ex ceeding the floating point type data Description Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not ex ceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not ex ceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data to 16 bit inte ger conver sion round ing the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit inte ger conver sion round ing the first decimal point down to integer Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 12 130 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Ime Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO and FP e the P type high level instructions are not available 2 The inst
212. ntrol op eration F175 Pulse output SPSH Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the Linear inter designated data table so thatthe path to the target posi polation tion forms a straight line F176 Pulse output SPCH Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the Circular in designated data table so thatthe path to the target posi terpolation tion forms an arc 12 114 Specifications Availability utput i C56 C16 C20 C32 nstruction for N A N A 12 8 Table of Instructions 12 115 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand Screen display instructions FP e screen display registration FP e screen display switching Basic function instruction Auxiliary DSTM timer 32 bit Data transfer instructions F190 Three 16 bit MV3 p190 datamove pmy3 F191 Three 32 bit DMV3 191 datamove ppmy3 Logic operation instructions 32 bit data AND S D 51 52 S3 D S1 S2 S3 D Description Register the screen displayed on the FP e Specify the screen to be displayed on the FP e Turn on the specified output and R900D after 0 01 s x set value 51 D 52 D 1 53 D 2 5111 51 D 1 D 524 52 D 3 D 2 341 53 D 5 014 5111 S1 AND S24 52 DH D 32 bit data OR 32 bit data XO
213. o Y5F Y60 to Y7F Ime Note WY3 Y30 to Y3F WY5 Y50 to Y5F WY7 Y 70 to Y 7F Please verify with the manual for the FPO CC Link slave unit 12 8 FPO Specifications 12 2 1 0 Allocation Table Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input output relays X and Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below A il Example External input relay X Decimal 12 3 12 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 9 A B F X OX lassen aeter X F KO Xe MM resa exo tero X 1F X 207 X 213 ms X 2F to to to KOTOR X 12 9 Specifications FPO 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Numbering Function C32 SL1 Relays External input 208 points X0 to X12F Turns on or off based on exter relay nal input External out 208 points YO to Y 12F Externally outputs on or off state put relay Internal relay R 1 008 points Relay which turns on or off only Note 1 RO to R62F within program Timer 144 points If a TM instruction has timed out Note 1 TO to T99 C 100 to 6143 the contact with the same Note 2 number turns on Counter If a CT instruction has counted Note 1 up the contact with the same number turns on Special internal 64 points Relay which turns on or off relay
214. o two driver systems can be connected When using CHO FPO Home input X0 Near home input Driver Pulse output YO E ont Y2 Directional Switching output The near home input specifies the desired input such as X2 When using CH1 FPO Home input X1 Near home input Driver Pulse output YI Y3 Directional switching output The near home input specifies the desired input such as X3 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input Since a double pulse input is used switching must be performed by an external relay One output contact is used as a pulse output for relay switching The pulse output terminal and home input I O allocation is determined by the channel used For detailed information we section 9 2 1 Set the control code for instruction F168 to No directional output For detailed information F168 SPFD1 When using CHO FPO Home input X0 X2 Near home input CW Driver Pulse input YO output Y4 input H X2 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input Y 4 or other desired output can be specified for the relay switching Atthis time the relay must be switched earlier by the amount of its operation time Caution when u
215. ockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit that prevents clockwise and counter clockwise signals from inputting into the motor at the same time 7 1 2 Emergency Stop Circuit Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs 7 1 3 StartUp Sequence The FPO should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e Setthe mode switch from PROG mode to RUN mode after power is supplied to all of the outside devices e Program the FPO so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized pase Note When stopping the operation of FPO also have the I O devices turned OFF after the FPO has stopped operating next page Wiring FPO 7 1 Safety Instructions 7 1 4 Momentary Power Failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms the FPO continues to operate If the power is OFF for 5 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset If operation is to be continued following recovery from the momentary power failure use an automatic retaining sequence program that uses a hold type internal relay 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections An insulated pow
216. of Instructions Availability FP M C16 C20 C32 N A N A Integer type data processing instructions I Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 For the the P type high level instructions are not available 12 121 Specific ations FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Scaling of 16 bit data Boolean Operand Description The output value Y is found for the input value X by per forming scaling for the given data table Scaling of 32 bit data The output value Y is found for the input value X by per forming scaling for the given data table Integer type non linear function instructions Upper and lower limit control 16 bit data Upper and lower limit control 32 bit data Deadband control 16 bit data Deadband control 32 bit data LIMT PLIMT DLIMT PDLIMT DBAND PDBAND When S1 gt S3 S1 D When S2 lt S3 S2 D When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 53 D When S1 1 S1 341 53 5111 51 D 1 D When S241 S2 341 53 5211 S2 D 1 D When S141 51 or z S341 3 or z 524 S2 341 3 0 1 D When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 D When S2 lt S3 S3 92 50 When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 0 D When S1 1 S1 5341 53 5341 S3 5141 S1 D 1 D When 5211 52 341 53 5341 53 5241 52 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 or 834 S3 or S2 1 S2
217. of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description 16 bit data Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by compare comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition AND 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 S2 or 91252 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51552 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 5S2 or 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 5S2 or S1 S2 12 70 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability 16 bit data compare AND 16 bit data compare AND AN 16 bit data compare AND AN 16 bit data compare AND AN 16 bit data compare AND AN 16 bit data compare AND Ie Note e A Available N A Not available 12 71 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description 16 bit data Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by compare comparing two 16 bit data in the
218. ogrammable display unit AIGTO030B 1 AIGTO0030H1 80mA or FPO Control Units 2 2 Specifications Current consumption example CI4RS E32T 16 E16RS fo utntono dofoio eTe e e Jo 5 n e T oBoBonu otion n MEENE EENE NENE A EEEE EENE 1 mor At power supply connector of expansion I O unit FPO E16RS Current consumption FPOEIGRS At power supply connector of control unit Type Current consumption 100 mA FPO E16RS 20 mA FP Programmer II Ver 2 50 mA Total current consumption 235 mA or less Control Units FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 2 Performance Specifications type T32C SL1 C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP Programming method C ontrol method method Control method T yo points Relay symbol Cyclic operation Total 10 Total 14 Total 16 Input 6 Input 8 Input 8 Output 4 Output 6 Output 8 Total 32 Input 16 Output 16 Total 32 Input 16 Output 16 Max 128 Input 64 Output 64 atS LINK block Max 96at Basic unit expansion block With expans
219. on exists under normal conditions it will be flagged as an error the ERROR ALARM LED will light and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to Check for Duplicated Use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using FP Programmer II Operate the TOTAL CHECK function Key operation i 5 ER If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUP USE and the address will be displayed Using FPWIN GR software Execute the Debug on Totally Check P rogram If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUPLICATED OUTPUT ERROR and the address will be displayed If you execute SEARCH AN ERROR the error message will be displayed and the first address number will be displayed Enabling Duplicated Output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable when using FP Programmer II set K1 When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed Precautions During Programming FPO 8 1 Use of Duplicated Output 8 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of Internal and Output Relays During Operation When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instr
220. ore I O devices Up to seven boosters can be connected to one system for any individual S LINK control unit but the actual number which can be connected varies depending on the units configuring the system and the wiring length g Note The FPO S LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring function FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 7 judging Errors from the Error Indicators 4 7 udging Errors from the Error Indicators If an error occurs in the S LINK system the ERROR indicator indicated in the table below lights depending on the content of the error ERROR indicators Description Steps to take Short circuit between D G If the ERR1 or ERR3 indicator lights output of note 1 the signal being transmitted stops and none of the S LINK devices connected to the sys tem will operate Also if a short circuit occurs at a location far away there may be times when ERR1 does not light Check the S LINK signal power line Error in level of signal being There is a possibility that the wiring length the transmitted configuration or the number of configuration devices connected to the system exceeds the rated limit Check the system configuration once again Address has been changed Check to see if the S LINK signal power line D or G line is broken or dis is broken or disconnected or if the address is connected incorrect Error in S LINK unitfordis In this case transmission signals are being played addres
221. page is preset in the set value area SV FPO Precautions During Programming 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN Method 1 Method using the programming tool software Procedure Select Monitoring Registers from the Online menu Explanation of each column 1 Displays the line number 2 Displays the device code and device number 3 Displays the monitored data During online monitoring you can make changes to the data by either pressing Enter in this column or by double clicking 4 Displays the base decimal hexadecimal binary or ASCII and the number of words 5 Displays the I O comment for each register You can input I O comments for each register by either pressing Enter in this column or by double clicking Click in each column and change the settings For details please refer to the FPWIN GR help menu The FPWIN GR tool software has a similar menu For information on operating the menus please check the Help menu Precautions During Programming FPO 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN Method 2 Method using the FP Programmer II Use the word data monitor function to read the set value area SV of the timer or counter to be changed and rewrite the value Example of changing the value of SVO from K30 to K50 Procedure 1 Execute word data monitor OP8 C 2 Read SVO DA 3 Clear SVO HELP CLR 4 Write the new changing va
222. ps M amp Example Setting 19 200 bps for both the tool port and RS232C port Write H100 Setting the Reception Buffer System Registers 417 and 418 In the default settings all areas of the data registers are set to be used as reception buffers To change the area of the data register used as the reception buffer specify the initial number in system register 417 and the volume number of words in system register 418 The reception buffer is configured as shown below Initial area specified with Number of system register 417 reception bytes Number of words specified Sorte by system register 418 m Ne 10 7 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 3 1 If None is Set for Start and Terminal Codes Relationship between the flags reception completed flag and transmission completed flag and the F144 TRNS instruction External received A B C CR D E F G data Cannot be stored when reception completed flag is on on R9038 Reception completed flag off Lj F144 TRNS v Duplex transmission dis instruction 4 abled while F144 TRNS execution off struction is being execute on R9039 Transmission completed flag
223. put ch 2 X1 count input ch 1 X4 count input ch 3 L X2 reset input Note 8 X5 reset input Note 8 Minimum input pulse width 50us 10 100us lt 5kHz gt Counter mode Not Two phase individual direction decision two phase available Input point number Two channels maximum Maximum counting speed 2kHz maximum for all 2 channels Input contacts used X0 count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 0 X4 count input ch 2 L X2 resetinput L X5 reset input Minimum input pulse width IE 50us 10 5 100us kHz Control Units FPO 2 2 Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C16P C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP Special Output point Not avai Two independent points Y 0 and Not functions number Y1 no interpolation function avai Output Not avai 40Hz to 10kHz Y 0 Y 1 one point frequency output 40Hz to 5kHz Y0 Y 1 two point output Output point Not avai Two points YO and Y 1 number Output Not avai Frequency 0 15Hz to Frequen frequency 38Hz Cy Note 9 0 15Hz to Duty 0 1 to 99 9 1 Duty 0 196 to 99 9 Program and system EEPROM register Operation memory Areas which are held if the power Areas The opera Areas supply fails are fixed and are which are tion which are retained by the EEPROM held if the memory is he
224. quence basic instructions Lo C E Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact Start Not Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed con tact Out R L Outputs the operated result to the specified output Not Inverts the operated result up to this instruction AND AN ROLE Connects a Form A normally open contact serially pis AND Not AN EET Connects a Form B normally closed contact serially orc Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel X Y R T C L P E OR Not NER Connects a Form B normally closed contact in parallel Leading Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the leading edge start XYRTCLPE edge ofthe trigger is detected Trailing Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing edge start edge of the trigger is detected 12 52 FPO Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability o a u C24 C56 C16 C20 C16 C40 C72 C32 Sequence basic instructions BEEN OPP RRR EN EE ee ede A A A A A A AND A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Leading N A N N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A edge start Trailing N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A edge start Notes A A A A A A A A A e A Available N A Not available 1 In
225. r 2000 XP AFPS51540 Ie Note Small type version can be used for the FP e FPO FP1 and FP M series Type of computer and suitable cables Connector on PLC side Product No D Sub 9 pin Mini DIN round 5 pin AFC8503 Mini DIN round 5 pin straight type AFC8503S Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Control Units Parts and Terminology 2 3 2 1 1 Control Unit Types sssaaa 2 4 2 1 1 1 Status Indicator LEDs 2 6 2 1 1 2 Mode Switch 2 6 2 1 1 3 TOOR OM eue bea pd ERE 2 6 Specifications vis deseo hed Mew ance 2 7 2 2 1 General Specifications 2 7 2 2 14 Weight pe es 2 7 2 2 1 2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit 2 8 2 2 2 Performance Specifications 2 10 2 2 3 5 2 14 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points 2 15 2 2 4 Output Specifications 2 16 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type 2 16 2 2 4 2 Transistor Output Type 2 17 Internal Circuit Diagram ccc eee eee eee 2 18 2 3 1 Relay Output Type C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM 2 18 2 3 3 Transistor Output Type 2 19 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT 2 19 2 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CP 2 21 w nextpage
226. rent which can be supplied supplied to S LINK unit and I O devices from 24V OV line 24V DC 5A fuse 5A Transmission method Bi directional time divided multiple signal transmission Synchronization method Bit synchronization frame synchronization Transmission protocol S LINK protocol Transmission speed 28 5kbps Transmission delay time Max 10 7ms Main signal wire up to a distance to 200m max 400m when a booster is used 320 FAN out note 2 Connection method T branch multi drop wiring note 3 No of input output points 64 points input 64 points output Fixed Display Transmission Green LED blinks in response to synchronization signals indicators display SEND Red LED light up depending on the error Error address If the system error occurs the error address is displayed using the red 7 segment display LED Notes 1 For detailed information on current consumption refer to Determining the Power Supply in the S LINK Design Manual 2 The output capacitance for the D G line of the S LINK controller and booster is indicated by FAN out and the input capacitance from the D G line of the S LINK configuration unit is indicated by FAN in When configuring the S LINK system the configuration should be set up so that the FAN out total gt or the FAN in total For detailed information on calculating the FAN in value and other values see the S LINK Design Manual
227. ring RUN 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area Transfers to SV area when mode changes to RUN mode Timer set value 5 RGO 30 T5 YO This method rewrites the value in the set value area The program itself is not rewritten Changing values in the set value area SV Values in the set value area SV can be changed with the following procedures Method using the programming tool software FPWIN GR Method using the FP Programmer II Method using the program high level instruction Operation and cautions after the change After the change the timer or counter in operation will continue to run Operation based on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condition changes from off to on With these methods the value in the set value area SV will change however the program itself will not change Therefore when the mode is changed and then setback to RUN or when the power is turned on operation will take place as follows When a set value in the program is specified by a constant K The constant K is preset in the set value area SV After the change it will no longer be effective When a set value in the program is specified by a set value area number In the case of a non hold type timer or counter 0 is preset in the set value area SV In the case of a hold type timer or counter the value changed by the method on the following
228. rror The address where a operation error occurred is address non hold stored Each time an error occurs the new ad dress overwrites the previous address At the be ginning of scan the address is 0 Monitor the ad dress using decimal display DT90019 DT9019 2 5ms ring counter The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5ms HO to HF FFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5ms Elapsed time between the two points 12 29 Specifications FPO 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address Description FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT9020 S LINK status flag Available type error flag SL1 S LINK communication status 1 Communication in progress ERR4 1 Disconnected wire or S LINK input output unit error ERR3 1 Problem with voltage level between D and G Not used ERR1 1 Short circuit between D and G Notes S ERR1 and ERR3 occur even if the power supply on the S LINK side is interrupted but are can celed when the power supply is turned on again S ERR4is held To cancel it repair the disconnected wire inthe S LINK system orwhateveris causing the problem and then either turn the power to the FPO on again press the SET switch to reset it or turn the powersupply on again on the S LINK unit side 12 30 Specifications Address 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Descript
229. rs 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting this value to 0 the whole area becomes hold type Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes non hold type Default value T32 Timer All non hold type Counter hold type Internal Non hold Non hold type 10 words WRO to WR9 relay type Hold type Hold type 53 words WR 10 to WR 62 Data register All hold type 12 15 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers 12 4 3 Table of System Registers C10 C14 C16 C32 T32 and SL1 in the table respectively indicate 10 point 14 point 16 point 32 point type and S LINK type FPO control units Address Default value Allocation of user memory Sequence program area capacity Description The set values are fixed and cannot be changed The stored values vary depending on the type K3 3K words FPO C10 C14 C16 K5 5K words FP0 C32 SL1 K10 10K words FP0 T32 Not used 6to 8 Timer and counter division setting of starting counter number Not used Available type C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter Available type T32 Hold type area starting number setting for internal relays in word units Available type T32 Hold type area starting number setting for data re
230. rs DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value il Example 1 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter example of changing the elapsed value X H HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT9044 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function n amp Example 2 Reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter and copies it to DT100 X7 HDF F1 DMV DT9044 DT100 Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value is automatically transferred from the elapsed value area to the special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Target value match on instruction F166 XA HDF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 If the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y 7 turns on XB HDF F166 HC1S K2 20000 Y6 If the elapsed value DT9104 and DT9105 DT90104 and DT90105 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y 6 turns on Target value match off instruction F167 XC HDF F167 HC1R K30000 Y4 If the elapsed value DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 for channel 1 matches K 30000 output Y 4 turns off XD HDF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 If the elapsed value DT9108 and DT9109 DT90108 and DT90109 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y 5 turns off High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO
231. rst Second Third 4 iOpen of Control expansion expansion expansion I O unit unit I O unit B 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 32 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 B 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 zr 32 16 Input 24 Output 24 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 M 16 32 Input 8 Output 8 Input 16 Output 16 m 16 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 32 32 Input 32 Output 32 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 E 32 16 16 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 16 32 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 16 Output 16 nput 8 Output 8 16 16 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 a 32 32 16 Input 40 Output 40 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 nput 8 Output 8 32 16 16 4 16 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 16 32 32 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 _ 16 32 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 E 32 32 32 Input 48 Output 48 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 32 32 16 4 16 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 _ 16 32 32 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 np
232. rt the crimped wire into the housing until it contacts the back side Housing When removing a wire use a flat head screwdriver or other similar tool to pull up the hold down pin of the housing and then pull out the wire Screwdriver Pull up Hold down pin Pull out w Wire Wiring FPO 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type The housings semi cover and pressure welders listed below come supplied with the FPO Use the wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Supplied connector Unit Type Order number C16 E16 C32 E32 CIGCS Housing Opin Wpe onl E16 E32 Semi cover AXW61001 2 pieces 4 pieces Welder contact AXW7221 5 pin x 4 5 pin x 8 Suitable wires twisted wire Size Conductor cross sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current AWGS22 3mm sto dia 11 fAwG 24 2m 9 79097 Pressure connection tool Order number AXY 52000 Procedure The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor 1 Bend the welder contact back from the carrier and set itin the pressure connection tool 2 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops and lightly grip the tool w nextpage FPO Wiring 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 3 After press fitting the wire insert it into the housing 4 When all
233. ruction is available for FPO T32C and FPO C10 C 14 C 16 C32 CPU Ver 2 0 or later 12 131 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Operand F331 P331 Floating point type data to 16 bit inte ger conver sion round ing the first decimal point off to integer Description Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D F332 P332 DROFF PDROFF Floating point type data to 32 bit inte ger conver sion round ing the first decimal point off to integer Converts real number data specified by 5 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D FINT PFINT F333 P333 Floating point type data round ing the first decimal point down The decimal part of the real number data specified in 511 S is rounded down and the result is stored in 01 D F334 P334 FRINT PFRINT Floating point type data round ing the first decimal point off Floating point type data sign changes Floating point type data abso lute F337 P337 Floating point type data degree radian The decimal part of the real number data stored in 541 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D The real number d
234. s note 2 output so the S LINK input output devices operate normally 1 This ERROR indicator lights even if the external power supply to the S LINK has not been turned on but this does not indicate a breakdown in the S LINK control unit itself Check the external power supply to the S LINK 2 ERR4 is held so to cancel it one of the following is required turn the power supply to the FPO off and then on again press the system SET button and enter the settings again or turn the power supply on the S LINK side off and then on again S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 8 J udging Errors Address Displays 4 8 udging Errors Address Displays The transmission line is monitored at all times and if an error occurs the address at which the error occurred is displayed as a hexadecimal value m RUN ERROR ue dg ADDRESS nm 2 ERROR H H E ADDRESS AANI 9 9 4 m display RUN o n SET 4 Ol a During normal transmission The 2 J shaped charactor rotates in the clockwise direction LI LI GE nn If an error occurs The address is displayed In case faults occur at several locations the smallest error address is displayed and the decimal points light up simultaneously ERROR indicator
235. s in the on state Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 to Do not use high speed counter For detailed information we section 12 4 FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 2 Control Mode Incremental lt relative value control gt Outputs the pulse of the pulse number set by the target value By setting H02 incremental forward off reverse on in the control code with instruction F168 when the target value is positive the directional output is turned off and the elapsed value of the high speed counter increases When the target value is negative the directional output turns on and the elapsed value of the high speed counter decreases By setting H03 in the control code the directional output is the reverse of that above For detailed information F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 Absolute lt absolute value control gt Outputs the pulse set by the difference between the current value and the target value The difference between the current value and the target value is the output pulse number By setting H12 absolute forward off reverse on in the control code with instruction F168 when the current value is less than the target value the directional output is turned off and the elapsed value of the high speed counter increases When the current value is greater than the target value
236. s on 12 39 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error Atthe S TATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be Cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clearthe contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory notstored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consultthe table of self diagnostic error codes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a P C orother computer device thatoccur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 12 40 FPO Specifications 12 7 Error Codes J Table of Syntax Check Error Description and steps to take A program with a syntax
237. s one bibe prp 10 5 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 8 10 3 1 If None is Setfor Start and Terminal Codes 10 8 10 3 2 If Yes has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Code ETX 10 9 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function oos eto Yee 11 3 11 1 1 Allowing Duplicated Output RR Ren 11 4 11 1 2 11 4 11 2 Troubleshooting s ope See IET ia pete ine Peed ikaw EIE VE EN 11 5 11 2421 ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking eee eee eee 11 5 11 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED iS ON eeu teens sexes 11 7 112 3 AWLEDS are DTP rie EE YS bed rta N E NONO 11 7 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfinctonin d o aorta nen 11 8 11 2 5 PROTECT ERROR 11 10 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 10 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications Vete bey aie Oe ase ede eed eis 12 3 12 2 1 0 Allocation Table 29 Sexe ENS sag 12 7 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 10 12 4 Table of System Registers vias rx eva REX 12 12 12 4 1 System Registers Lund s erc rae oe ip tr PT Rt e aa 12 12 12 4 2 5
238. section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type E16T E32T When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply for driving internal circuitare the same In this situation there is only one power supply FPO E 16T E32T 5 6 e X20 SS aes nemal i circuit 1 Let 5 6 kQ d X2n 8 4 e L Inemal aL A es circuit DL m 24VDC ON Note WW Internal EN po oe 9 Load 9 circuit MY Des W ItemalL U e e M Load e circuit 7 amp a 24 V DC External power supply and load voltage jg Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load voltage 5 V DC and 12 V DC
239. sible on the first scan execution type Output is set to and held at off Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on No opera NOP No operation 1 tion 12 56 Specifications Leading edge differ ential initial execution type Set Availability C24 C56 C16 C20 C16 C40 C72 C32 N A N A N A N A N A N A gt FP2SH Reset Keep No opera A A A A A A A A A A A A tion Notes e A Available N A Not available 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y 1280 R 1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 12 8 Table of Instructions 12 57 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Description Basic function instructions After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 0 01 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on Auxiliary After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output timer I F137 STMR 5 DH and R900D are set to on 16 bit Auxiliary
240. side of the unit so that the internal connector is exposed SSS STS 00000000 555 Notes e When peeling the seal on the side of the initial lot products the shaded part is exposed Cut off the shaded part with a pair of nippers or similar tool so that the internal connector is exposed AD NSSN Shaded part Cut here e When removing the shaded part use a sharp cutting object making sure that the shaded part is removed leaving a smooth surface Note that failure to remove the shaded part completely can result in damage to the connector m next page FPO Installation Adding Expansion Units 6 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver 2 Expansion hook Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit 3 and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units Expansion unit Control unit gt Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure the unit 4 Installation 6 2 Important Notes 6 2 Important Notes Please read the following notes carefully before the installation of your FP O I Notes e Avoid installing the uni
241. sing a double pulse input driver When using the FPO pulse outputs YO and Y 1 for direct connection to the CW input and CCW input of a driver the counter elapsed values for the separate channels ch0 and ch1 increase and decrease in response to the individual outputs The elapsed values can thus be sentto the program as necessary FPO Driver CW input YO gt CCW input 1 1LL High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function Positioning control instruction F168 Automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table Ee Fo Mv H102 DT100 F0 MV K500 DT101 F0 MV K5000 DT102 F0 MV K200 DT103 F0 MV K0 DT106 Fi DMV K10000 DT104 F168 SPD1 DT100 HO Generates a pulse from output YO at an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 200 ms and a movement amount of 10000 pulses 5000Hz 10000 pulses 500Hz 0Hz i 200 ms 200 ms At this time the high speed counter elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT 90044 and DT90045 will be increasing Ue Notes e Fortrapezoidal control setthe initial speed to no more than 5000 Hz e Fordetails on troubleshooting procedures when no pulse is output when instruction F168 SPD1 is executed refer to pa
242. staken polarity 10 pin unit Attaches to relay output and terminal block type Additional part FP 0802 Terminal socket 2 sockets per pack Attaches to relay output and Molex connector types Additional part AFP 0801 2 sockets per pack Attaches to transistor output type Additional part AFP0807 2 sockets per pack Attaches to FPO various units Additional part Length 1 m 3 281 ft AFP0581 1 socket per pack Molex socket Wire press socket FPO Power cable FPO Overview 12 Expansion Possibilities 1 2 Expansion Possibilities Be sure to check that the units are added according to the following restrictions e A maximum of three expansion I O units or analog I O units can be connected to one control unit e There are no restrictions on the combinations of the kind control units and expansion units e A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible e The expansion unit can be attached directly to the control unit easily Special expansion cables backplanes and so forth are unnecessary as the expansion unit employs a stacking system that uses expansion connector and expansion hooks on the surface of the unit itself H H H KJ ECCE 9 otoo e H
243. ster setting or initialize the system registers Configur A parameter error was detected in the ation para MEWNET W2 configuration area Seta meter error correct parameter Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 Stops Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request Interrupt A hardware problem or error due to noise Stops ibl error 1 IS possible Turn off the power and check the noise conditions A Available 12 43 Specifications FPO 12 7 Error Codes Interrupt n Multi CPU data un mouche CPU2 Stops ror I O status E MEWNET F slave ille gal unit Stops error MEWNET F remote VO limita tion error MEWNET F I O map Stops ping error MEWNET F slave terminal Stops mapping error Description and steps to take There is no interrupt program for an inter rupt which occurred Check the number of the interrupt pro gram and change it to agree with the interrupt request This error occurs when a FP 3 FP 10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data regis ter DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one FP3 Check the contents of special data regis ter DT9036 and locate the abnormal u
244. structions F166 to F170 Near home processing for home return operations High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function A 2 Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration x3 I X pF Fo MV H 4 DT9052 INE t FO MV H 0 DT9052 In the above program the near home input is enabled in step 2 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations j X M Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output XT H pF MF0 MV H 8 DT9052 FO MV H 0 DT9052 Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built in high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the F1 DMV instruction and the special data register DT9044 DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value il Example 1 Setthe initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter example of writing the elapsed value X1 H DF F1 DMV K3000 DT9044 i Example 2 Reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter to DT100 X I DF F1 DMV DT9044 DT100 t Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value is automatically transferred from the elapsed value area to the
245. supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 8 1 Input X20 X21 X28 X29 ole Nada geo COM Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 9 E8YT E8YT Output B e Load Load e Y20 z Load Load i v2 e Load Load e J 8 Load Load 9 g 4 q C 3 4 10 E8YP Output E8YP Y20 Y21
246. t or initial speed lt or able is set to HFF 8000 or Yes Remedy problem Yes Remedy problem No Remedy problem No Remedy problem Please contact your dealer Remedy problem Remedy problem FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 5 PWM Output Function 9 5 PWM Output Function 9 5 1 Outline of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the instruction F170 PWM the specified duty ratio and pulse width modulation is obtained Applicable to analog controls such as temperature control and light modulation Setting the system register When using the PWM output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 to Do not use high speed counter For detailed information ww section 12 4 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function PWM output instruction F170 X6 H FO MV H5 DT100 FO MV K500 DT101 F170 PWM DT100 KO While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 840 ms and duty ratio of 50 is output from Y 0 X7 Fo MV H6 DT100 FO MV K300 DT101 F170 PWM DT100 K1 While X7 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 1 6 s and duty ratio of 3096 is output from Y 1 High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 95 PWM OutputFunction Chapter 10 General use Serial Communications 10 1 10 2 10 3 General use Serial Communications Function 10 10 1 1 General use Ser
247. t in the following locations Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gases Excessive airborne dust or metal particles Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Excessive vibration or shock Direct sunlight Water in any form including spray or mist e Avoid noise interference from the following items Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the above countermeasures are taken it is recommended to supply power through an insolated transformer noise filter or like w next page Installation FPO 6 2 Important Notes e Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Installation which Installations such that the I O blocks the air duct connectors or I O terminals face down Horizontal installation of the unit Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors w next page FPO Installation 6
248. t time setting for multi frame communi cation ms In programming tool software enter the time a number divisible by 2 5 In FP Programmer II enter the set value equal to the time divided by 2 5 Constant value settings for scan time With the FPO values set with the program ming tool become invalid K1 to K64 2 5 ms to 160 ms Scans once each specified time interval K0 Normal scan set value x 2 5 ms Constant value setting for scan time ms In programming tool software enter the time a number divisible by 2 5 In FP Programmer II enter the set value equal to the time divided by 2 5 12 17 Specifications FPO 12 4 Table of System Registers Default Description value High speed Setting by Do not set input 0 as high speed counter mode programming counter settings XO to tool software 2 phase input X0 X1 x2 2 phase input X0 X1 Reset input X2 3 Incremental input X0 4 Incremental input X0 Reset input X2 Decremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 Individual input X0 X1 Individual input X0 X1 Reset input X2 9 Direction decision X0 X1 10 Direction decision X0 X1 Reset input X2 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter 3 Incremental input X1 4 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2
249. tage 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be connected FPO C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT Input side 5 6 KQ X0 O e Internal Elm circuit ES E Note 1 Sekel 9 Ld f T X1 O i O 9 Internal Note circuit b a DTI 1 EET x eni d e o Xn Quo 9 Internal TRA ea Note 24V DC circuit D w mena naar ae 7 T Note 2 e v COM pawl Ld e Output side Law bd T Internal 5 p e e YO Toad for5 V circuit HO Li tate _ e e e i Internal KL e e Y1 Load for 5 V o circuit J e ZON LY ZN AN e e e e Internal XL L s3 Yn Load for24 V 24V DC circuit X b 5vpCc External Rated load ww power supply voltage for driving _ o o gt e internal circuit Ie Notes 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 for XO through X5 and 1 for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Control Units 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 22 PNP Open Collector Type C16P C 16C P C 32P C32CP T32C P FPO C16P C 16C P C 32P C32C P T32CP
250. tary Power Failures 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output SIC UON Ses es edente Mo t siot ees Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit GitOUftdlfi sus UE et ie oe ets ht st TAA SENSO S nuc 7 4 2 LED Equipped Reed Switch 7 4 3 Two Wire Type Sensor s 7 4 4 LED Equipped Limit Switch Output WITD u rax eee Ee ER 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads Wiring the Terminal Type cece eee ees Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type 05 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 7 8 1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring Wiring the LI Li LI Li Li Az UJ UJ C2 UJ 10 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 19 20 Wiring FPO FPO Wiring 7 1 Safety Instructions 7 1 Safety Instructions In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power ON timing differences between the FPO control unit and I O or motorized devices e An operation time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the FPO unit power supply circuit or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate Safety circuits or other safety measures listed in the following 7 1 1 Interlock Circuit When a motor clockwise counter cl
251. te the GND terminal and functional earth are connected Outside Outside structure structure FPO Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring 555 Notes e Besure to select the thickness dia of the input wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the input wiring is separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input wires from the power and high voltage wires by atleast 100 mm 3 937 in In this section you find some examples for wiring sensors an LED equipped reed switch a two wire type sensor and a LED equipped limit switch 7 4 41 Sensors Relay output type NPN open collector output type Input terminal V Input terminal Sensor COM FPO lc FPO Internal Internal E ircui circuit Powersupply Power supply for sensor for input Power supply for input Universal output type Two wire type next page Input terminal Input terminal Sensor Sensor M F FRO FPO Internal COM Internal COM circuit nema circuit Power supply for input Power supply for input PNP open collector output type Input terminal Sensor pm E p COM Internal circuit Power supply for input Wiring FPO 7 4 Input
252. ter wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise Wire R at Wire CORRECT INCORRECT Wiring FPO 7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type 7 7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type The housings and contacts listed below come supplied with the FPO Use the wires given below Also use the required special tool for connecting the wires Housing Contact Suitable wire Supplied connector Manufacturer Hem Product number Molex J apan Co Ltd Housing 51067 0900 2 pieces 50217 8100 20 pieces Suitable wires twisted wire Size AWG 24 to 18 Conductor cross sectional area 0 2 to 0 75 mm Insulation outside diameter dia 1 4 to dia 3 0 Special crimping tool Manufacturer Molex J apan Co Ltd Product number 57189 5000 Procedure 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation Wire 3to 3 5 mm 0 118 to 0 138 in me next page FPO Wiring 56 Note 7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type 2 Place the contact in the crimping tool place the wire in the contact and lightly squeeze the tool 25 Contact 3 Inse
253. ternal power supply for S LINK When turning off the power supplies reverse the order of the sequence noted above S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On 4 5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On Refreshing S LINK I O data With the S LINK control unit I O data is refreshed by the CPUs of both the FPO section and the S LINK section through the memory shared between them S LINK control unit data area refreshed Shared memory FPO S LINK section section CPU CPU i data refreshed The illustration below shows the time required until the first refreshing is completed by the S LINK control unit after the power supply has been turned on The external power supply for the S LINK is already on Power supply of S LINK control unit turned on S LINK section 2 6 seconds data refreshed section dataarea 0 07 seconds refreshed When the power supply to the S LINK control unitis turned on it takes approximately 2 6 seconds for the S LINK I O data to be verified by the FPO section Be particularly careful with regard to the FPO sequence program if using the S LINK input at the b contact relay when the power supply is turned on FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 1 Reco
254. the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using X1280 Y 1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 12 53 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Leading edge AND Boolean Symbol X Y R T C L P E Description Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge AND Leading edge OR Trailing edge OR Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading edge out Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing edge out Alternative out Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Inverts the output condition on of
255. the right D1 D2 Control instructions Master con Starts the master control program trol relay H c nH Master controlarea 4 Z Master con Ends the master control program trol relay MSE end Jump JP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 2 3 Lj or nH from there 2 Label LBL ABL 1 Auxiliary The program jumps to the label instruction specified by jump Fi sJP s H S and continues from there Label L BL 9 4 12 60 Specifications 12 8 Table of Instructions Availability Shift regis ter Left right shift register Control instructio Master con trol relay 25 105 4 u u Master con trol relay end Jump Label Notes N A N A N A N A N A N A A Available N A Not availble 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP 10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 12 61 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Symbol Descriptio
256. the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register 22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data reg isters DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register 22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at Intelligent unit error in the sta tus display function I O unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data reg ister FPO DT90010 FP DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit Check the contents of special data reg isters FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using sys tem register 23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at Verify error in the status display function System watching dog timer error Selectable Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watch ing dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using sys tem register 24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 A Available
257. tings Communication is not enabled in the default settings for the RS232C port To enable communication the items outlined below must be specified using the system registers Usage purpose of the RS232C port RS232C transmission format Baud rate Reception buffer Setting the Usage Purpose of the RS232C Port System Register 412 Specify General use port this is K2 for the FP Programmer Il This is the setting which enables serial communication Setting the RS232C Transmission Format System Register 413 The transmission formatis as follows in the default settings With the FP Programmer Il this is H3 Datalength 8 bits Parity check Yes odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminal code CR Start code STX None Set these items to match the external device connected to the RS232C port and if changing the transmission format enter settings for the pertinent individual items With the FP Programmer the various items should be selected in bit units as shown below and settings entered using H constants 15 6543210 LJ LJ Start code 0 STX None 1 STX Yes Terminal code 00 CR 01 CR and LF 10 None 11 ETX Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits Parity 00 None 01 Yes odd 11 Yes even Data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits w next page 10 5 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 2 System Register Settings Start codes STX and terminal codes EXT When data is transmitted the specifie
258. tions PWM output function By using the appropriate instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio When you increase the pulse width juri heating increases When you decrease it heating decreases 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter Channel number There are four channels for the built in high speed counter The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range K 8388608 to K8388607 HFF8000 to H7FFFFF Coded 24 bit binary FPO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 1 Specifications Table of high speed counter function specifications Input outputcontact number Built in Memory area used Performance specifica being used high tions On off Count Input Control Elapsed Target Minimum Maximum output mode contact channel flag input counting speed number no pulse value in i width Using Using paren only 1 mul thesis is chan tiple reset nel chan input nels R903A DT9044 DT9046 FO MV DT9045 DT9047 F1 DMV DT90044 DT90046 F166 DT90045 DT90047 HC1S F167 R903B DT9048 DT9050 DT9049 DT9051 Sm DT90048 DT90050 DT90049 DT90051 CH2 R903C DT9104 DT9106 DT9105 DT9107 DT90104
259. tions and Additional Parts Specifications Product No A Data hold type A A Relay output type Necessary when wiring terminals block Phoenix Molex connector Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors MOLEX 57189 5000 AFP0805 pressure contact tool Multi wire connector Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors AXY 52000 pressure contact tool AF FPO Slim 30 type Screw stop attachment plate for 30 mm 1 181 inch width the unit P0811 set for 10 mounting plate FP Memory loader Terminal screwdriver Slim type FPO mounting Screw stop attachment plate for FPO expansion unit Slim model AFP 0803 set for 10 plate Flat type FPO mounting Screw stop attachment plate for FPO control unit Flat model AFP 0804 set for 10 plate Loose wiring cable 9 leads AWG20 with Molex socket attached at Length 1 m 3 281 ft AFP0551 2 cable set Relavio DUE e one end 0 5 mm 1 set 2 cables blue amp white 2 1 0 cable Length 3 m 9 843 ft AFP0553 2 cable set 1 Wire pressed terminal cable 10 leads AWG22 0 3 mm with con Length 1 m 3 281 ft AFP0521 2 cable set sida nectors attached at one end 1 set 2 cables blue amp white Length 3 m 9 843 ft AFP0523 2 cable set Flat cable connectorfor If you are using flat cable connector request the part specified below for a connector with an M1 FPS FPO transistor type asymmetrical design to prevent mi
260. tions in 0 01 s cycles relay 0 02 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles relay 0 1 5 clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles relay 0 2 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles relay 1s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 s cycles relay 2 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles relay 1 min clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles relay Not used RUN mode flag Turns off while the mode selector is setto PROG Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9021 to n Not used R9025 R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed Note R9027 Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is setto REMOTE Note R9028 SS Not used 55 Note Used by the system 12 27 Specifications FPO 12 5 Table of Special Internal R elays Address Wame R9029 Note Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for I O relay and timer counter con tacts External interrupt Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruc enable flag tion R902C to R902F Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs Not used R9030 R9031 Not used R9032 R9033 RS232C portmode When General use port is selected K2 goes on flag
261. to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on DF gt 1 Correctto 0 At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if the between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 second and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 second After discharging the battery including when the power is turned on for the first time the values of DT90053 to DT90058 change at random Once the time and date have been set these values will function normally 12 36 Specifications Address FPO T32 DT90059 DT90060 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT9059 DT9060 Serial communication error code Step ladder Process 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Description bit 15 1211 DT9059 DT90059 Y m Error flag of Error flag of RS232C port tool port S Tool port bit 0 2 1 Over run error bit 1 1 Framing error bit 2 1 Parity error SRS232C port bit8 2 1 Over run error bit 9 2 1 Framing error bit 10 1 Parity error Indicates the startup condition of the step la
262. to F170 are executed the control flag special internal relay R903A to R903D corresponding to the used channel turns on When the flag for a channel turns on another instruction cannot be executed using that same channel Example of prohibited application While executing F166 target value match on instruction and flag R903A is in the on state F167 target value match off instruction cannot be executed with CHO High speed Counter P ulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items Restrictions for maximum counting speed pulse output frequency The counting speed when using the high speed counter function will differ depending on the counting mode as shown in the table il Example 1 While in the incremental input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH1 if CHO is being used at 8 kHz then CH1 can be used up to 2 kHz Example 2 ied While in the 2 phase input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH2 if CHO is being used at 1 kHz then CH2 can be used up to 1 kHz The maximum output frequency when using the pulse output function will differ depending on the output contact number as shown in the table il Example 1 When using either only YO or only Y1 the maximum output frequency is 10 kHz Example 2 imd When using the two contacts YO and Y1 the maximum output frequency is 5 kHz When using the high speed counter function and pulse output function specifi
263. to the FPO control unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device e Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line 24 VDC and GND terminal of the FPO power supply connector is connected to the frame ground F G through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line 24 VDC and GND and earth the varistor may be shorted Power supply connector of FPO control unit 24V DCO e ower supply lines GND Varistor Varistor 39 V DC F G Q 4 i aa Wiring FPO 7 3 Grounding When the plus side is grounded do not ground the functional earth terminal Do not ground the FP 0 functional earth terminal if the plus terminal of the power supply is grounded Depending on the PC some types have the SG terminal of the RS 232C port connected to the outside structure of the connector Also the outside structure of the FPO tool port is connected to the functional earth terminal For this reason connecting a PC will connect the FPO GND terminal to the functional earth terminal In particular because a voltage of 24 V will be applied to the GND terminal when the plus terminal is grounded a potentially damaging short circuit will occur when in this sta
264. ts 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type Recharging the internal backup battery A secondary battery rechargeable type is used as the backup battery in the control unit 10 K step type When shipped this battery is not charged therefore please make sure it is sufficiently charged before using Recharging is automatic when DC power is supplied When backup is possible of operation memory Relationship between recharging time and backup time The number of days forthe backup time changes with the proportion of recharging time Please use the graph below to verify the number of days for the backup time Relationship between recharging time and backup time B 190 96 a c 80 3 50day 25 C 40day 25 C k 60 E p 30 day 25 C t j 20 m 10 day 25 C e T T T T T 0 8 16 24 48 72 Recharging time h Number of days for backup depending on ambient temperature The number of days for the backup differs as shown in the table below when recharging is done for 72 hours at a certain ambient temperature Ambient temperature Number of days for backup time 70 C Approx 14 days 25 C Approx 50 days 20 C Approx 25 days Control Units FPO 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type Predicted life of internal backup battery When the control unit is on when power is supplied the internal backup battery life will differ depending on the ambient temperat
265. uctions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation Example Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This section of the program is gt processed as if RO were on This section of the program is processed as if RO were off This section of the program is processed as if RO were on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same outputis used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer instructions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the results of the operation at the greatest program address A Example Output to the same output relay YO with OT SET and RST instructions X0 YO n YO on X1 YO Hs Y0 on x2 YO HR YO off When to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update If you need to outputa result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 IORF FPO Precautions During Programming 8 2 Handling BCD Data 8 2 Handling BCD Data 9 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number A il Example Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 6 4 Each digitis converted to a binary number Y Y Y BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 8 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC When inputting data
266. uffer When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer If there are two start codes data following the later start code is overwritten and stored in the reception buffer Reception is disabled while the reception completed flag R9038 is on The reception completed flag R9038 is turned off by the F144 TRNS instruction Because of this if the F144 TRNS instruction is executed at the same time that the terminal code is received the reception completed flag will not be detected 10 9 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication When sending data Transmitted data STX a b r STR c d j Transmission Transmission n2039 P ransmission completed flag of i on Duplex transmission F144 TRNS in disabled while F144 struction execution TRNS instruction is being executed Send buffer le B ela c c b c d d d d d re e e e e e t Number of bytes not yetsent lt 2 gt 15 0 3 2 lt l gt 0 0 Transmission point Start codes STX and terminal codes ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted
267. unter and have a fast response time If used as normal inputs we recommend inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise may be interpreted as an input signal FPO Control Units 2 2 Specifications 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by the temperature FPO C 14RM C 14C RM C 14R S C 1ACRS at 24 V DC Number of 8 input points per common which are simultaneous 3 ON at 26 4 V DC 2h ES m mue me m dea Chee eol 35 45 55 95 13 131 Ambient temperature C F FPO C16T C 16CT C 16P C 16C P at 26 4 V DC Numberof 8 at 24 V DC input points per common S whichare 4 4 simultaneous Es s ON 45 50 55 113 122 131 Ambient temperature C F FP0 C32T C32CT C 32P C32C P T32CT T32CP at 26 4 V DC at 24 V DC Numberof 16 input points per common E which are Bi une simultaneous 6 1 ON 23 31 55 73 4 87 8 131 Ambient temperature C F Control Units FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 4 Output Specifications 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type FPO relay output types C10RM C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM C14CRM C14RS C14CRS m Beerpin Output type Normally open 1 Form A relay output Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC 2 A 30V
268. upply voltage Input 24V DC Sink Sourse common 24V DC Sink Sourse common Relay output 2A Connection type Product No MIL connector FPO E8X AFP03003 A Relay output 2A Terminal block FPO E8RS F P 03023 Molex connector FPO E8RM AFP03013 Terminal block F PO E8YRS FP03020 Output 8 Transister otuput NPNO 1A Transister otuput PNP 0 1A MIL connector FPO E8YT FP03040 FPO E8TP FP03050 FPO E16 Expansion Unit E32 Expansion Unit Input 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 Notes 24V DC Sink Sourse common 24V DC Sink Sourse common 24V DC Sink Sourse common 24V DC Sink S ourse 4common Relay outpu Transister o NPN 0 Transister o PNP 0 1A Transister o NPN 0 Transister o PNP 0 1A Transister o NPN 0 Transister o PNP 0 1A MIL connector MIL connector F 6X 2A Terminal block FPO E16RS Molex connector FPO E16RM 2 F T FP03003 AFP03323 AFP03313 AF P 03343 L connec L connec AF P 03353 1 The control units and relay output type expansion units come with a power cable part number AFP0581 The transistor output type expansion units need no power cable 2 The terminal block type relay output units have 2 terminal blocks 9 pins made by Phoenix Use a 2 5 mm 098 in
269. ur DT90056 Clock calendar monitor and setting year month DT90057 Clock calendar monitor and setting day of the week DT90054 DT90055 DT90056 Minute data H00 to H59 BCD Day data H01 to H31 BCD Year data H00 to H99 BCD Second data H00 to H59 BCD Hour data HOO to H23 BCD Month data H01 to H12 BCD DT90057 Day of the week data H00 to H06 BCD 12 35 Specifications FPO 12 6 Table of Special Data Registers Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 DT90058 Clock calendar time setting and 30 seconds correction Description The clock calendar is adjusted as follows When setting the clock calendar by program By setting the the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time be comes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV in struction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Can not be performed with any instruction other than FO MV in struction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on X0 DF 1 L 1 F0 MV H DT90054 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds FO MV H 512 DT90055 Inputs 12th hour 5th day FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time If you changed the values of DT90054 to DT90057 with the data monitor functions of programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write
270. ure R efer to the table below to predict the life of the internal backup battery Note When the control unitis off when power is not supplied temperature has almost no effect on the battery life Ambient temperature Internal backup battery life 55 C Approx 430 days approx 1 year 45 C Approx 1 200 days approx 3 years 40 C Approx 2 100 days approx 6 years 35 C Approx 3 300 days approx 9 years 34 Cand less Approx 10 years Range of backup possible with the internal backup battery The range that the user specifies with the programming tool from among the computation memories given below will become the holding backup area 1 Timer counter T C 2 Internal relay R 3 Data register DT 4 Step ladder Ifthe user does notmake a designation the default setting range will become the backup holding area The clock calendar timer value is also backed up The program and system registers are held in EEP ROM with no relation to the internal backup battery Handling of the internal backup battery It is not possible to replace the internal backup battery when it has been exhausted or has exceeded its life span Cautions regarding the backup of data The clock calendar timer value is backed up by the secondary battery Begin use only after the secondary battery has been sufficiently charged For reference To read and use the initial settings data when starting operation you c
271. us or less ON 1msorless YO and Y1 only 50 us or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator For NPN open collector type able to be used with different voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for driving the internal circuit External power supply for driving internal circuit 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated load voltage Yn 5 V to 24 V DC Internal v e Load circuit 1 w os Ground for load voltage and ieee for external power supply for s driving internal circuit Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 1 Relay Output Type EBRS E8RM E 16RS E 16RM FPO E8RS E8RM E 16R S E 16RM 5 6 WW 9 Internal b circuit P SRM KKS 7 Le i 5 6 An AN X2n 5 4 Internal e 1kQ 1 circuit B Bi 9 e 24 V DC Note Output side Y20 Internal 3 x circuit Load e UE circuit Power supply e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e Thel O number given above is the number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit
272. ut 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 zt 32 32 32 16 Input 56 Output 56 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 16 32 32 32 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 32 32 32 32 Input 64 Output 64 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 Overview FPO 14 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disc capacity Product No FPWIN GR Ver 2 Full type WINDOWS 40 MB or more AFPS10520 English language 95 OSR2 or higher menu Upgraded version 98 Me NT Ver 4 0 or AFPS10520R Small type higher 2000 XP I Notes 1 Customers who use the FPWIN GR Ver 1 can use the FPWIN GR Ver 2 after purchasing the upgraded version software The upgrade version software can be installed only when the Ver 1 1 has been previously installed 2 Small type version can be used for the FP e FP FPO FP1 and FP M series IEC61131 3 compliant programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disc capacity Product No FPWIN GR Ver 4 Full type WINDOWS 100 MB or more AFPS50540 English language 95 OSR2 or higher menu 98 Me NT Ver 4 0 or Small type highe
273. ute the F144 TRNS instruction This turns off the error flag and transmits both actual and empty data 10 3 2 If Yes has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Code ETX When receiving data External received A B C 6 D E ETX F G 6T3 H ETX data Cannot be The reception x stored when code is deleted on reception by the F144 completed TRNS instruc R9038 flag is on ton Reception com f pleted flag 4 on Thereceptioncom F144 TRNS pleted flag is instruction turned off by ex execution off ecuting the F144 TRNS instruction Stored y Y Y Reception A A A A w OD D D D pe G H H buffer B B B B e E E E E E E E C C C C C C C C Number of recep 1 2 3 0 1 2 2 0 1 0 1 1 tion bytes Write pointer Number of Number of bytes Number of bytes received received is cleared bytes received is cleared when when F144 TRNS is cleared when start code is instruction is ex start code is received ecuted received The data is stored in the reception buffer in sequential order but at the point at which the start code is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception b
274. ve polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Control Units 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type C16T C 16CT C32T C32CT T32CT When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply for driving internal circuitare the same In this situation there is only one power supply FPO C16T C 16CT C32T C32CT input side 5 6 kQ Ss O O Internal NA B circuit i Note 5 6 Internal ge Note 1 nternal ME FEM circuit AH D m E 2V DC Eet Note 2 n R COM W Output side qa Internal L i Load circuit YO WW i PE E EE Y Intemal s 5 MEDI Load 9 circuit 9 C a 24 V DC External power supply and load voltage 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 for XO through X5 and 1 for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Control Units FPO 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load vol
275. ven above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 4 E16P E16P e Thetwo COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 445 32 x20 x21 E327 yog x29 w7 WF RUN 5 N Hsc jm o dz Salaa PES fore 5 Slee COM
276. wires has been inserted fit the semi cover into place I Note If using a MIL connector for flat cables please specify the order number AXM110915 7 8 1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section Wiring FPO 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port When using the RS232C port use the screw down connection type terminal and the wire according to the following procedures Control unit with RS232C port FPO CLOCRM C10CRS C14CRM C14CRS C16CT C16CP C32CT C32CP 6 NG SN tem Specification Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Transmission 3m 9 84 ft Bus DDS distance ws q 52 Terminal block Made by Phoenix Contact SU E Co 3 pin Product number MKDS 1 3 3 5 RS232C port Communication half duplex terminal layout REN Settings when shipped from the factory These are changed using system registers SRG 412 to 414 The settings in effect when the unit is shipped from the factory are noted SG Signal Ground below RUN
277. x apan Co product number 51067 0900 section 7 7 43 16 Expansion hook is used to secure expansion units The hook is also used for installation on FPO flat type mounting plate AF P 0804 Expansion connector connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit section 6 1 45 DIN rail attachment lever allows simple attachment to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on FPO slim type mounting plate AFP 0803 23 Input connector 10 pin 62 Output connector 10 pin Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 63 and 62 section 7 8 8 Input connectors 10 pin x 2 Output connectors 10 pin x 2 Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 0 and 68 section 7 8 RS232C port Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port such as an I O P a bar code reader or an image checker enabling data input and output section 7 9 Control Units FPO 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 1 1 Status Indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error Description RUN green Illuminates when in the RUN mode and indicates the execution of a program It flashes during forced input output PROG green Illuminates when in the PROG mode and indicates that operation has stopped ERROR ALARM Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic function Illuminates if a hard red ware
278. x P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected Boolean Operand Description Data transfer instructions 16 bit data MV move PMV 32 bit data i S 1 S D 1 D move 16 bit data 5 D invert and move 32 bit data invert and move Bit data in The specified one bit in S is transferred to the specified move one bit in D The bitis specified by n Hexadecimal ah The specified one digit in S is transferred to the specified digit 4 bit one digit in D The digit is specified by n data move Two 16 bit data move S1 1 S1 D 1 D 241 S2 D 3 D 2 The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to the area starting at D Block copy The data of S is transferred to the all area between D1 and D2 12 80 Specifications Number Availability Data transfer instructions FP1 1 12 8 Table of Instructions C56 C16 C20 C32 I Notes N A N A N A A A A A A A e A Available N A Not available 1 For the FPO FPX FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 12 81 Specifications FPO 12 8 Table of Instructions Boolean Data read from IC card Data write to IC card ROM Program read from IC memory card 16 bit data exchange Operand Description The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC
279. x EL EE LUDERE DRRCROER x A 8 A 6 Detailed Specifications of Cables ccc ccc nnn A 9 A 7 Connection between RS232C portand eee eee eee A 10 hi dem c r l 1 Record of changes oot R 1 Chapter 1 Overview Tel COMPONCIIS cua ride cages ecl erred a Rr y wits 1 3 1 1 1 FPO Control Units 12 c Lotte er URS 1 3 1 1 2 FPO Expansion Units cre RR 1 4 11 3 IntelligentUnits cece ee eee 1 5 LLA Bn UNIS ooo rem rer bel conden ete se 1 5 1 1 5 Power Supply nit ils ooo s 1 5 1 1 6 Options and Additional Parts 1 6 1 2 Expansion Possibilities osos irt rra d 1 7 1 3 Combination Possibilities uos ventre rd 1 8 1 3 1 Relay Output Type Units 1 8 1 3 2 Transistor Output Type Units 1 9 1 4 Programming TOOls 3 ord 1 10 Overview FPO FPO Overview 11 Components 1 1 Components 1 1 1 FPO Control Units Built in Specifications Product memo Product name Progiom Number of Connection No capacuty points type 24V DC Termina PO C10RS FP02123 FPO C10 y 1 Sink Sourse Control Unit common PO C10RM FPO C10 g 24V DC T PO0 C10CRS Control Unit x Sink Sourse with xcommon RS232C P0 C10CRM port 24V DC T PO C14RS FPO C14 y Sink Sourse i Control Unit common PO C14RM FP02213 FPO C14 24V DC PO
280. y connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Control Units FPO 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 6 C32P C32CP T32CP C32P C32CP X0 X1 X8 X9 Es 215 a AA t sa Fl aale COM PAN H L H mip OM g W 7 YF Ms Output YO Y1 ool Y8 Y9 M usc Load Load a oo 8 Load Load ps i Load Load Fe Load Load UE Ofe J eroe C e The four COM terminals of input terminals X0 7 and X8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Control Uni

FP0 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents